User Guide
®
™
Your Palm Centro Smart Device
Welcome. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
What’s in the box? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
What do I need to get started? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Where to learn more . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Centro™ Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Inserting the SIM card and battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Maximizing battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Making your first call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Setting up your computer for synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Synchronizing information—the basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Moving around on your Palm® Centro™ smart device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Moving around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Opening applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Turning your Centro™ smart device on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Making calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Receiving calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
What can I do when I’m on a call? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
How many minutes have I used? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Entering names and phone numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
C O N T E N T S
iii
Which email application should I use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
The VersaMail® application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Your Push to Talk application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Creating a PTT contact list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Viewing availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Using the Call Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Connecting with Bluetooth devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
C O N T E N T S
iv
Your photos, videos, and music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Camera and Camcorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Pictures & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Pocket Tunes™ Deluxe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Your personal information organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
World Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Your memos and documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Documents To Go® Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Voice Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Your application and info management tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Using Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Viewing and using the alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Calculator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Viewing application info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Beaming information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Synchronizing information—advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Using expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Your personal settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
System sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Display and appearance settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Applications settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
C O N T E N T S
v
Locking your Centro and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Connecting to a VPN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Common questions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Resetting your Centro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Making room on your Centro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Error messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Important safety and legal information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
C O N T E N T S
vi
CHAPTER
1
Welcome
Congratulations on the purchase of your Palm Centro smart
device!
®
™
Benefits
•
Make and receive phone calls
•
•
Browse the web
®
•
Manage your contacts, calendar,
and task list
Use a Bluetooth headset (sold
separately) for hands-free
operation
•
Receive and send corporate and
personal email messages
7
W E L C O M E
1
In one compact and indispensable device,
you now have all of the following:
•
•
•
Text and multimedia messaging
Music player
•
Phone application for making and
receiving calls
Applications for reading, creating, and
editing Microsoft Office files and
viewing PDF files
•
Push to Talk application for talking
instantly with other members who are
signed up to use this walkie-talkie type
of service
•
Desktop synchronization software for
entering names, addresses, and more
on your computer, and then transferring
them to your Centro with one press of a
button
•
Contacts application that stores the
names, phone numbers, and even
pictures of friends, family, business
contacts—everyone you stay in touch
with
TIP LOOK HERE: Don’t miss the helpful tips
and cross-references given in these boxes.
•
•
Email applications for receiving and
sending email (business and personal)
What’s in the box?
®
Palm OS by ACCESS personal info
applications for storing your
appointments, to-do lists, memos, and
more
You should have received all the following
items in the box:
•
•
Expansion card slot that accepts
Hardware
microSD cards (sold separately) for
storing music files, videos, dictionaries,
games, and lots of other applications
•
•
Centro
AT&T SIM card (not included with all
models; preinstalled in Centro on some
models; see Inserting the SIM card and
battery for details).
An SXGA 1.3 megapixel (1280 x 1024)
digital camera for snapping photos and
capturing short videos
W H A T ’ S I N T H E B O X ?
9
W E L C O M E
1
What do I need to
get started?
KEY TERM SIM (Subscriber Identity Module)
card The smartcard that you insert into your
Centro and that identifies you to the mobile
network. It contains your mobile account
information, such as your phone number and
the services to which you subscribe. Phone
book entries and SMS messages can also be
stored on the SIM card.
This guide helps you set up your Centro
and quickly learn to use it. To get started,
you need all the items that came in the
the following:
•
•
•
Rechargeable battery
AC charger
USB sync cable
•
Appropriate service contracts. Phone
and text messaging services and Push
to Talk service require a service contract
with AT&T. Web, email, and multimedia
messaging services require a service
contract and data services from AT&T.
Be sure to sign up for a mobile account
with data services. Data speeds vary
based on network availability and
Documentation and software
•
•
Getting Started Guide
Getting Started CD, which includes the
following:
®
• Palm Desktop software or a link to
this software
capacity. Please contact AT&T for
details about your data service options.
• Links to bonus software for your
Centro
• User Guide (this guide)
•
Palm warranty
TIP Missing something? Need help? Call AT&T
customer service: 1-800-331-0500 or call 611
from your Centro.
W H A T D O
I
N E E D T O G E T S T A R T E D ?
10
W E L C O M E
1
•
A SIM card. To use your Centro on the
AT&T network, you must insert the SIM
card into your Centro. Without a SIM
card, you can only call 911.
For a quick introduction
Quick Tour: The Quick Tour introduces you
to many of the features on your Centro.
It is already installed on your Centro, and
you can open it any time. Press
• If your Centro box did not contain a
SIM card, you need to contact AT&T
to get one.
Applications
Tour
, and then select Quick
.
• If you have an old SIM card from
Cingular Wireless, you can use it if it
conforms to the requirements for the
SIM card to be used in a Centro.
Tutorial: The Palm Tutorial explains how to
make calls, browse the web, and send and
receive email. Find the tutorial on the web
•
A location where you are within
coverage of the AT&T network.
While using your Centro
•
•
An electrical outlet.
On-device User Guide: A copy of this
guide is included on your Centro. The
on-device guide is specially formatted for
your Centro screen. To view the on-device
The computer with which you want to
synchronize your personal information.
guide, press Applications
select My Centro
, and then
.
Where to learn more
Tips: Many of the built-in applications
include helpful tips for getting the most out
of your Centro. To view these tips, open an
application, press Menu
Options, and then select Tips.
Whether you’re on the go or at your
computer, there are several ways to learn
, select
®
™
more about using your Palm Centro
smart device.
W H E R E T O L E A R N M O R E
11
W E L C O M E
1
Many dialog boxes have a Tips
icon in
Online forums: Consult online user
the upper-right corner. Select the Tips icon discussion groups to swap Centro
to learn about the tasks you can perform in information and learn about Centro topics
that dialog box.
you may find nowhere else. Visit
go.palm.com/centro-att/ for details.
Online support from Palm: For up-to-date
downloads, troubleshooting, and support
Customer service from AT&T: For
features, contact AT&T at 1-866-246-4852,
If you need more information
or dial 611 from your Centro.
®
Books: Many books on Palm OS devices
are available in local or online book retailers
(look in the computers section), or visit
W H E R E T O L E A R N M O R E
12
CHAPTER
2
Setting up
You’re about to discover the many things about your
Palm® Centro™ smart device that will help you better manage
your life and have fun, too. As you become more familiar with
your Centro, you’ll want to personalize the settings and add
applications to make it uniquely yours.
But first, take the few easy steps in this chapter to set up your
Centro and get it running.
Benefits
•
Know where your Centro controls
are located
•
Establish a link between your
Centro and your computer
•
Start using your Centro right away
13
In this chapter
S E T T I N G U P
2
TIP Protect your screen. Be careful to store
DID YOU KNOW
?
When your Centro screen is
your Centro away from items that might
scratch or crush the screen. Your Centro
comes with a screen protector. Visit
go.palm.com/centro-att/ to find carrying cases
and other useful accessories.
on, you can press the Side button to open the
Push to Talk application. If you decide not to
subscribe to Push to Talk, you can change
your button settings and select an application
details.
Back view
Speaker
Self-portrait mirror
Battery door
Camera lens
Infrared (IR) port
Expansion card slot
Headset jack
Sync connector
Power connector
Microphone
Lanyard loop
C E N T R O ™ O V E R V I E W
16
S E T T I N G U P
2
IMPORTANT The Centro speaker includes phone, email, or web features, the SIM
a large magnet, so be sure to keep your
Centro away from credit cards or other
items that could be demagnetized.
card must be inserted into your Centro.
NOTE Your SIM card may already be
installed in your Centro. Follow steps 1
through 3 to check. If a SIM card did not
come with your Centro, you may already
have one. If the SIM card does not work,
contact AT&T.
Top view
1
Press the battery door near the top and
slide the battery door downward to
remove it from your Centro.
Ringer switch
Battery door
DID YOU KNOW The Ringer switch silences all
?
sounds at once. You don’t need to hunt for Off
buttons all over the device.
Inserting the SIM
card and battery
2
If the battery is installed, remove it.
Your SIM card contains account
information such as your phone number
and voicemail access number. To use the
I N S E R T I N G T H E S I M C A R D A N D B A T T E R Y
17
S E T T I N G U P
2
3
4
If the SIM card is already installed, skip
to step 7.
Remove the stylus to make insertion of
the SIM card easier. Replace it when
you finish these steps.
5
Align the notch on the SIM card with
the right side of the SIM holder.
7
Align the metal contacts on the battery
with the contacts inside the battery
compartment, insert the battery into the
compartment at a 45-degree angle, and
then press it into place.
Battery
contacts
6
Insert the straight end of the SIM card
into the SIM holder, and then push the
SIM card forward until it fits into place.
Centro
contacts
I N S E R T I N G T H E S I M C A R D A N D B A T T E R Y
18
S E T T I N G U P
2
IMPORTANT Use the battery that came
with your Centro. Do not use a battery
synchronization software. Otherwise, you
may lose information or have difficulty with
from another Centro model in your Centro. synchronization. Support is not provided for
Similarly, do not use the Centro battery in
another Centro model. Using a battery that
is designed for another Centro model can
damage your Centro. For info on
replacement batteries, see Replacing the
mismatched language setups.
NOTE If the correct battery is inserted and
your Centro still does not turn on, you need
to connect it to the AC charger. Make sure
the AC charger is plugged in to a wall
outlet. If your Centro still does not turn on
after being connected to the AC charger for
five minutes, do a soft reset. See
NOTE Unauthorized batteries will not
power your Centro. Only a Palm approved
battery will wake up and power your
Centro. If your Centro does not turn on,
check to see whether an unauthorized
battery has been inserted in your Centro.
TIP The power-saving feature turns off the
Centro screen after a period of inactivity. To
wake up the screen, press and release
Power/End, and then press Center on the
5-way to turn off Keyguard.
8
9
Slide the battery door onto the back of
the Centro until it clicks into place.
Your Centro screen wakes up and
begins the setup process. When the
language selection screen appears,
select the language you want to use,
and then follow the onscreen
Charging the battery
The battery comes with a sufficient charge
to complete the setup process and activate
your phone. After activation, we
recommend charging your Centro for three
hours (or until the indicator light is solid
instructions to set up your Centro.
IMPORTANT Always use the same
language for your Centro, your computer
operating system, and your desktop
C H A R G I N G T H E B A T T E R Y
19
S E T T I N G U P
2
green) to give it a full charge. See
Maximizing battery life for tips on
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can also trickle-charge
your Centro without the AC charger by
connecting it to your computer with the sync
cable. Trickle-charging takes longer, however.
Be sure to plug your computer into a power
source, or your Centro could drain the
computer’s battery. For the quickest charge
time, use the AC charger.
maximizing the life of your Centro battery.
TIP To avoid draining the battery, charge your
Centro every day, especially if you use your
phone often.
DID YOU KNOW If your battery ever becomes
?
fully drained, your info is still stored safely on
your Centro until you connect it to a power
source and charge the battery.
When trickle-charging your Centro with the
sync cable, the indicator light may not turn on.
To make sure the battery is being charged,
check the onscreen battery indicator.
1
2
Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.
3
To confirm that your Centro is being
charged, check the indicator light on
your Centro.
Connect the charger cable to the
bottom of your Centro. Make sure the
arrow on the connector is facing up,
toward the screen.
• Solid red indicates that your Centro is
being charged.
• Solid green indicates that your Centro
is fully charged.
Indicator light
C H A R G I N G T H E B A T T E R Y
20
S E T T I N G U P
2
To see the remaining battery charge
expressed as a percentage, tap the
onscreen battery icon.
TIP If the battery is fully drained, it may take a
few moments for the indicator light to turn on
when you begin charging.
TIP If the indicator light does not turn on when
you connect your Centro to the AC charger,
double-check the cable connection and the
electrical outlet to which it is connected.
Battery icon
onscreen battery icon displays the charging
status:
A red lightning bolt indicates that the
battery is connected to an electrical
outlet and is being charged.
Maximizing battery
life
A green lightning bolt indicates that
the battery is connected to an
electrical outlet and is fully charged.
Battery life depends on how you use your
Centro. You can maximize the life of your
battery by following a few easy guidelines:
A partial battery without a lightning
bolt indicates that the battery is not
connected to an electrical outlet and
it has some power.
IMPORTANT You must use the battery
that came with your Centro or a
Palm-approved replacement. For info on
replacement batteries, see Replacing the
An almost empty battery that is red
at the bottom indicates that you
need to charge the battery
immediately.
M A X I M I Z I N G B A T T E R Y L I F E
21
S E T T I N G U P
2
Unauthorized batteries cannot power your
Centro. Only a battery approved by Palm
will wake up and power your Centro.
•
•
If you don’t plan to use the wireless
features on your Centro for a while, turn
let all calls be picked up by voicemail.
•
You can buy an extra battery as a spare
for long plane trips or periods of heavy
use. To purchase batteries that are
compatible with your Centro, go to
att.com/wirelessaccessories or visit
your local AT&T store.
As with any mobile phone, if you are in
an area with no wireless coverage, your
Centro searches for a signal, which
consumes power. If you cannot move to
an area of better coverage, temporarily
turn off your phone. While your phone is
off, you can continue to use the
•
•
Charge your Centro whenever you can.
Charge it overnight. The battery has a
much longer useful life when it is
topped off frequently than when it is
charged after it is fully drained.
nonwireless features of your Centro.
•
•
Turn down the screen brightness (see
The wireless features (phone, email,
messaging, Push to Talk, and web) and
media features (camera, media players,
eBooks, and games) of your Centro
consume more power than its organizer
features. Speakerphone usage also
consumes more power than using the
earpiece. If you use the wireless,
speakerphone, and media features
often, keep an eye on the battery icon
and charge when necessary.
Decrease the settings in Power
Preferences and turn off Beam Receive
®
•
Turn off the Bluetooth feature if you’re
not using it. See Connecting to a
M A X I M I Z I N G B A T T E R Y L I F E
22
S E T T I N G U P
2
3
Press Left to select the Dial Pad
tab.
Making your first call
Status
icons
1
2
Press Phone
.
If prompted, press Center
to turn
keyboard (Keyguard) for more info).
Call Log
Dial Pad
Favorites
Contacts
Main
4
Tap the onscreen Dial Pad to enter the
number you want to call.
Center
• If Check SIM Card appears in the title
• If a blank space appears in the title
bar, the phone is either searching for a
network or you’re outside a wireless
coverage area. It may take a few
moments for the title bar to display a
network name. If you believe you are
in a wireless coverage area and this
problem persists, contact AT&T for
assistance.
5
6
Press Send
to dial the number.
If prompted, press Center
Yes and turn on your phone.
to select
M A K I N G Y O U R F I R S T C A L L
23
S E T T I N G U P
2
What’s my phone number?
TIP If you are inside a coverage area and
cannot complete a call, contact AT&T for
assistance.
1
Make sure your phone is on (see
2
3
4
Press Phone
.
7
After you finish the call, press Power/
Press Menu
.
End
to end the call.
Select Options, and then select Phone
Info.
Adjusting call volume
While a call is in progress, press the
Volume button on the side of your Centro
to adjust the call volume.
Look here for
your phone
number
•
To increase the volume, press the upper
half of the Volume button.
•
To decrease the volume, press the
lower half of the Volume button.
If your phone number doesn’t appear in
Phone Info, make sure your SIM card is
properly inserted into your Centro. If your
phone number still does not appear in
Phone Info, look for the number on the
plastic holder to which the SIM card was
attached. If you still need assistance,
please contact AT&T.
Volume
Side button
M A K I N G Y O U R F I R S T C A L L
24
S E T T I N G U P
2
•
•
•
•
32MB of available memory (RAM)
170MB of free hard disk space
CD drive
Setting up your
computer for
synchronization
Available USB port
Mac OS X version 10.3 to 10.5:
•
•
•
•
128MB of total memory (RAM)
190MB of free hard disk space
CD drive
Before you can synchronize the info on
your computer and the info on your Centro,
you need to install the desktop
synchronization software and connect the
sync cable to your computer.
Available USB port
You can use either Palm® Desktop software
(included) or Microsoft Outlook for
Windows (sold separately) as your desktop
software.
Upgrading from another PalmOS® by
ACCESS device
NOTE If you are setting up your first Palm
Not familiar with synchronization? See
When you install the desktop software
from the Getting Started CD, some
third-party applications may be quarantined
because they are not compatible with the
Palm OS software version 5.4.9 on your
Centro. Quarantined files are not installed
on your Centro, nor are they deleted.
These files are placed in a new folder on
your computer: C:\Program
System requirements
Your computer should meet the following
minimum system profiles for Windows or
Mac computers.
Windows XP Service Pack 2 (SP2),
Windows Media Center Edition 2005, or
Vista:
Files\Palm\<device name>\PalmOS5
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N
25
S E T T I N G U P
2
Incompatible Apps. (Can’t find a Palm
1
Calculate how much space your apps
and info occupy on your previous Palm
OS device.
folder in Program Files? Then look for a
folder labeled palmOne or Handspring
instead. For more info, see I can’t find my
• In Applications View, open the menus.
• Select Info on the App menu.
IMPORTANT Synchronize your Centro only
with the version of Palm Desktop software
included with your device. Older versions
may not work correctly.
• At the bottom of the screen, select
Size.
TIP We do not recommend using third-party
utilities that back up your old device’s
information onto an expansion card and then
transfer the info to your Centro. Such methods
transfer all applications to your Centro,
including those that are not designed to work
with Palm OS version 5.4.9.
• Look at the numbers on the Free
Space line and subtract the number
on the left from the number on the
right to calculate the space used. For
example, on the device shown here,
22.4 – 17.5 = 4.9. This means that
4.9MB of space is occupied on this
device.
You can transfer all compatible applications
and information from your previous Palm
OS device—whether it’s a handheld or a
Treo—to your new Centro, so long as the
space taken up by all the info you want to
transfer is 64MB or less. This includes your
calendar events, contacts, memos, and
tasks, as well as your application settings
and any compatible third-party applications
and files.
2
If the space occupied on your previous
device is 64MB or less, go to step 3. If
the space occupied is greater than
64MB, do any of the following to reduce
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N
26
S E T T I N G U P
2
the storage space you’re using before
you go to the next step:
• Connect your Centro to your
• Delete any third-party applications
that you no longer use.
• Indicate that you want to sync only
the info in your PIM apps (Calendar,
Contacts, Memos, and Tasks). This is
strongly recommended to ensure an
optimal upgrade experience. Or
indicate that you want to sync all info
and apps (excluding apps known to be
incompatible).
• Move large files, such as eBooks and
images, to an expansion card.
• Move third-party applications to an
expansion card.
• Purge old info in applications such as
Calendar (Date Book), Tasks (To Do),
and email. Refer to the
documentation that came with your
previous device for instructions on
these items.
• Select a device name for your Centro;
be sure to select the same name that
you used for your old device. (To
locate this name, select the HotSync
application on your old Palm device.
The device name appears in the
3
4
Synchronize your previous device with
your previous desktop software to back
up your information one last time.
upper-right corner of the screen.)
Install the desktop synchronization
software from your new Getting Started
6
7
MAC ONLY If you have pictures on
your previous device, copy them from
your previous device to an expansion
card or beam them to your Centro.
5
During the installation process, sync
your Centro with your new desktop
software as instructed. When
prompted, do the following:
If you plan to continue using your
previous device, perform a hard reset
on your previous device to remove its
associated device name. (See the
documentation that came with your
previous device for instructions on
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N
27
S E T T I N G U P
2
performing a hard reset.) Each device
BEFORE YOU BEGIN If you are installing
on a computer at work, make sure your
computer is configured to let you install
new software. Contact your company’s
IT department for help.
you synchronize with your computer
must have a unique name. The next
time you synchronize your previous
device with your computer, be sure to
assign it a new name.
If any third-party applications are
quarantined during the installation, do not
manually install them. Contact the
third-party developer for software updates
and info about compatibility with your
Centro.
TIP If you want to sync info with applications
other than Palm Desktop or Microsoft
Outlook, you need to purchase additional
third-party sync software. This sync software
is sometimes called a conduit.
1
2
Close any applications that are currently
running on your computer, including
those that are minimized. Your
computer needs to have all its
resources available to install the
software.
If you have trouble upgrading or finding
Installing the desktop synchronization
software
IMPORTANT Even if you already own a
Palm OS device and have installed a
previous version of the desktop software,
you must install the software from the
Getting Started CD that came with your
Centro.
Insert the Getting Started CD into the
CD drive on your computer.
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N
28
S E T T I N G U P
2
Palm Desktop software or Microsoft
Outlook.
NOTE Whether you select to synchronize
with Microsoft Outlook or Palm Desktop
software, Palm Desktop software is still
installed on your computer. If you use
Outlook as your desktop email application,
select Outlook as your desktop
synchronization software. Remember that
when you enter information on your
computer, you must enter it in the software
you selected in this step.
3
4
If you are installing on a Mac,
double-click the CD icon on the desktop,
and then double-click the Palm
Software.pkg icon.
• The installation process prompts you
to connect your Centro to your
computer. Go to the next section.
When the installation wizard opens,
follow the onscreen instructions. Note
these important points about the
installation.
Connecting your Centro to your computer
After you install the desktop software (see
software), you’re ready to connect your
Centro to your computer.
• When the language selection screen
appears, select the same language
you selected on your Centro.
1
2
Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.
Plug the USB sync cable into an
available USB port or into a powered
USB hub connected to your computer.
• WINDOWS ONLY You can choose
which desktop software you want to
use for synchronization:
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R F O R S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N
29
S E T T I N G U P
2
Synchronizing
information—the
basics
TIP For best performance, plug your sync
cable directly into a USB port on your
computer. If your computer has USB ports on
both the front and back, we recommend using
the back port; the front port is often a
low-power port. If you use a USB hub, make
sure the hub has its own power supply.
Synchronizing means that info you enter or
change in one place (your Centro or your
computer) is automatically entered or
changed in the other; so there’s no need to
enter the info twice. We strongly
recommend that you sync your Centro with
your computer or corporate server
frequently to keep your info up-to-date (and
backed up) in both locations.
3
4
With the sync button facing up, connect
the sync cable to the bottom of your
Centro. Do not press the sync button
until you are instructed to do so.
(Optional) Connect the charger cable to
the bottom of your Centro.
You are now ready to synchronize; go to
The info from all the following applications
is updated by default each time you sync
your Centro with your desktop software:
How each application syncs depends on
your computer type and the desktop
software you are using, as follows:
Sync button
Sync cable
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — T H E B A S I C S
30
S E T T I N G U P
2
Computer type
Desktop software
What syncs and where
Windows
Microsoft Outlook
•
Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and
Tasks sync with Outlook.
•
Pictures & Videos syncs with
Palm Desktop.
Windows
Mac
Palm Desktop
Palm Desktop
All apps sync with Palm Desktop.
All apps sync with Palm Desktop.
For more sync options, including which
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To sync your info,
you must install Palm Desktop software
from the Getting Started CD that came
with your Centro—even if you sync with
Outlook or another third-party application.
software for instructions.
Sync button
Messages on both your computer and
your Centro indicate that
synchronization is in progress.
1
Connect your Centro to your computer,
3
Wait until you see the message on your
Centro that the HotSync operation is
complete; then disconnect the sync
cable. Do not disconnect the sync cable
until you see this message.
2
Press the sync button on the sync
cable.
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — T H E B A S I C S
31
S E T T I N G U P
2
Problems synchronizing? See
Where’s my info stored?
Synchronization for troubleshooting
suggestions.
When you synchronize your Centro, your
info is stored on your computer in one of
these locations:
If you’re finishing your initial setup, you
now have the option to install bonus
software. If you choose to install some of
the bonus software, you need to sync
again to install the software on your
Centro. You can also install bonus software
Windows XP and earlier: Program Files >
Palm > HotSyncUsername
Windows Vista: Username > Documents
> Palm > HotSyncUsername
For info on locating your pictures and
videos on your computer, see Viewing
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — T H E B A S I C S
32
4
CHAPTER
3
Moving around on your
Palm® Centro™ smart device
Have you ever been to a new city and felt a bit lost until you
figured out that the numbered streets run north/south and the
avenues run east/west? Learning to move around on your
Centro is similar. Most applications on your device use the
same set of controls in the same way. So once you learn how
to use these controls on your Palm® Centro™ smart device,
you’ll be driving all over town and you won’t even need a map.
Benefits
•
•
•
Find and open applications quickly
Access extra features with menus
•
Access many more characters and
symbols than are displayed on the
keyboard
Move around in applications with
one hand, using the 5-way
navigator
33
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® C E N T R O ™ S M A R T D E V I C E
3
Moving around the
screen
TIP Some third-party applications may not
work with the 5-way navigator, and you must
use the stylus instead.
DID YOU KNOW
?
In this guide, we use arrow
icons to indicate directions on the 5-way.
These are different from any onscreen arrows
that you tap with your stylus or select with the
5-way to display pick lists.
To move around the Centro screen, you
can use the 5-way navigator for
one-handed navigation, or you can tap
items on the screen with the stylus. With
use, you will find your own favorite way to
scroll, highlight, and select menu items.
The 5-way includes the following buttons:
Center
Up
Left
Right
Down
M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N
35
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® C E N T R O ™ S M A R T D E V I C E
3
Highlighting and selecting items
On most screens, one item—a button, a
list entry, or a check box—is highlighted by
default. The highlight identifies which item
is affected by your next action. Use Left
,
Right , Up , and Down on the
5-way to move the highlight from one item
to another.
TIP If the item you want doesn’t appear on the
screen, try tapping the onscreen scroll arrows
to view more info.
Colored background: When a phone
number, text, an email address, a web link,
or an item in a list is highlighted, the item is
displayed as white text against a colored
background. Examples of lists include the
Contacts list, the Messaging Inbox, and the
Tasks list.
Learn to recognize the highlight. It can take
two forms:
Border glow: When an entire screen, an
onscreen button (such as Done, New, or
OK) or a pick list is highlighted, a glow
appears around its border. If an entire
screen is highlighted, the glow appears at
the top and bottom of the screen only.
After highlighting an item, you can select or
activate it by pressing Center
, or by
tapping the item with the stylus.
TIP When a border appears at the top and
bottom of a list screen, press Center on the
5-way to highlight the first item in the list.
TIP After you open an application (see
Opening applications), experiment with using
the 5-way to highlight various screen
elements.
M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N
36
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® C E N T R O ™ S M A R T D E V I C E
3
Highlighting text
Selecting menu items
You can use the stylus to highlight text on
the screen.
Many applications have menus to give you
access to additional features. These menus
are usually hidden from view, but they
•
Tap and drag the stylus across the text
you want to highlight.
appear when you press Menu
. To get
the most out of your Centro, it’s a good
idea to familiarize yourself with the
additional features available through the
various application menus.
•
•
To highlight a word, double-tap it.
To highlight a paragraph, triple-tap it.
Accessing command buttons
1
Press Menu
to display an
In most applications, command buttons
such as New, OK, and Details appear at the
bottom of the screen. In many cases, you
can jump directly to these buttons instead
of scrolling to them.
application’s menus.
•
•
•
From a list screen, such as the Memos
list, press Right to jump to the first
button.
Menu shortcut
From a screen where you create or edit
entries, such as Contact Edit, press
Center
to jump to the first button.
2
3
4
Press Right and Left to switch
From a dialog box, such as Edit
between menus.
Categories, press Up
or Down to
Press Up
menu item.
and Down to highlight a
scroll to the buttons.
Press Center
to select the menu
item, or press Menu
to close the
menu and cancel your selection.
M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N
37
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® C E N T R O ™ S M A R T D E V I C E
3
•
To exit the pick list without making a
selection, press Left or Right
Stylus: Use your stylus to tap the pick list.
TIP Most menu items have menu shortcuts
listed in the menu. To use a menu shortcut,
press Menu plus the shortcut letter. You don’t
have to see the menu item to use the menu
shortcut.
.
•
•
Tap the item you want from the list.
To exit the pick list without making a
selection, tap outside the list.
Selecting options in a pick list
A range of options is often presented in a
type of menu called a pick list, which can
be identified by a downward-pointing
arrow. Pick lists are different from the
application menus previously described.
The application menus give you access to
additional features, and pick lists let you
select the contents for a particular field.
You can select items from a pick list with
the 5-way or the stylus.
5-way: Use the 5-way
to highlight the
pick list, and then press Center
to
display the items in the list.
•
•
Press Up
the item you want.
and Down to highlight
Press Center
to select the
highlighted item.
M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N
38
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® C E N T R O ™ S M A R T D E V I C E
3
Using the keyboard
Backlight
Backspace
Return
Option
Shift/Find
Menu
Space
Alt
TIP When using the keyboard, most people
find it easiest to hold the Centro with two
hands and use the tips of both thumbs to
press the keys.
DID YOU KNOW
?
The Centro includes a
keyboard backlight that turns on and off when
the screen turns on and off. The backlight also
dims when an active call lasts longer than a
specified period of time. See Optimizing
power settings to adjust the automatic
shut-off and dimming intervals.
U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D
39
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® C E N T R O ™ S M A R T D E V I C E
3
Entering lowercase and uppercase letters Entering numbers, punctuation, and
symbols
•
To enter lowercase letters, press the
desired keys.
Numbers, punctuation, and symbols
appear above the letters on the keys.
To enter these characters, do one of
the following:
•
To enter an uppercase letter, press
Shift/Find
key. You don’t need to press and hold
Shift/Find while entering a letter.
and then press a letter
Symbol
Letter
When Shift is active, an up arrow
appears in the lower-right corner of the
screen.
•
To turn Caps Lock on, press Shift/
•
Press Option , and then press the
key with the desired character shown
above the letter. You don’t need to press
Find
Shift/Find
is on, an underlined up arrow
appears in the lower-right corner of the
screen.
twice. To turn it off, press
once. When Caps Lock
and hold Option
while pressing the
second key. When Option is active, the
symbol appears in the lower-right
corner of the screen.
•
To turn Option Lock on, press
Option
Option
twice. To turn it off, press
once. When Option Lock is
on, the symbol appears in the
lower-right corner of the screen.
U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D
40
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® C E N T R O ™ S M A R T D E V I C E
3
1
Enter the character that corresponds to
the symbol or accented character you
want. See the table on the next page.
DID YOU KNOW Some application views, such
?
as the Dial Pad tab in the Phone application or
the Calculator, automatically default to Option
Lock. In this case, you do not need to press
Option to enter numbers.
2
3
Press Alt
.
Press Up , Down , Right , or Left
to highlight the desired character.
Entering other symbols and accented
characters
4
Press Center
character.
to insert the
Symbols and accented characters that do
not appear on the keyboard are available
DID YOU KNOW
?
Alternate characters are
grouped by their similarity to the base key. For
example, the alternate characters available
from the E key are é, è, ë, and ê.
when you use the Alt
key.
U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D
41
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® C E N T R O ™ S M A R T D E V I C E
3
0
Symbols and accented characters
Enter…
Then press
Alt to
Enter…
Then press
Alt to
Enter…
Then press
Alt to
select…
á à ä â ã å æ
Á À Ä Â Ã Å Æ
ß
select…
select…
ú ù ü û
Ú Ù Ü Û
x ¤
a
n
ñ
u
A
N
Ñ
U
b or B
o
ó ò ö ô œ õ
x or X
c
ç ¢ ©
O
Ó Ò Ö Ô Œ Õ
y
Y
!
ý ÿ
C
Ç ¢ ©
p or P
r or R
s
¶
Ý Ÿ
e
é è ë ê
É È Ë Ê
í ì ï î
®
¡
E
ß š
ß Š
™
?
:
¿
i
S
:-) :-( ;-)
£ ¥ ¢
I
Í Ì Ï Î
t or T
$
l or L
£
Press Alt
by itself, after a space or at the beginning or end of a line, to select these
characters:
; _ • \ % = ° ÷
£ ¥ ¢ [ ] { } < > « » © ® ™ ~ ^ ø |
U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D
42
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® C E N T R O ™ S M A R T D E V I C E
3
Using the quick buttons
Opening applications
The front of the Centro has three quick
buttons—Phone, Calendar, and
When you open an application using a
quick button or Applications View, you
automatically close the app you were
previously using.
Messaging—that open applications. The
fourth button opens Applications View (see
TIP You can customize the quick buttons
Applications
Messaging
Phone
Calendar
O P E N I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S
43
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® C E N T R O ™ S M A R T D E V I C E
3
Each quick button opens two applications:
Assigning an application to the
Messaging button
•
To open a button’s primary application,
simply press the button.
The first time you press the Messaging
button, you are asked to select the primary
application for the button from the available
email and messaging applications. For
more information on each of these
Button
Primary app
Phone
Calendar
Xpress Mail or
Messaging
1
2
Press Messaging
.
Select the application you want this
button to open. You can select Xpress
Mail or Messaging (text and
multimedia messages).
NOTE The first time you press Messaging
, a dialog box appears in which you
can select the primary application (see
button).
You can change the primary application at
•
To open a button’s secondary
application, press Option
press the quick button.
DID YOU KNOW
?
Pressing Option + Menu dims
and then
your Centro screen.
Buttons
Secondary app
+
+
+
Web
Memos
Messaging
O P E N I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S
44
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® C E N T R O ™ S M A R T D E V I C E
3
Using Applications View
4
Press Center
to open the selected
application.
You can access all available applications
through Applications View.
In Applications View, you can also do the
following:
1
2
Press Applications
.
•
•
Press Applications
repeatedly to
Press Center on the 5-way to turn off
(Keyguard) for more info).
cycle through various categories of
applications. See Applications settings
for more info on categories.
3
Use the 5-way
to highlight the
Enter the first few letters of the
application’s name to highlight it. For
example, if you press P, it highlights
Phone; if you then press R, it highlights
Prefs. If you pause and then press R, it
highlights the first application that starts
with R.
application you want to use.
TIP You can press and hold Applications from
any screen on your Centro to select from a list
of your most recently used applications.
O P E N I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S
45
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R P A L M ® C E N T R O ™ S M A R T D E V I C E
3
O P E N I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S
46
CHAPTER
4
Your phone
The Phone application is your home base for making and receiving calls
and for storing info about the people you need to stay in touch with.
You can effectively manage multiple calls, such as swapping between
calls, sending text messages to ignored calls, and creating conference
calls with up to five callers. Your Palm® Centro™ smart device helps you
perform all these tasks with ease.
You can do more than manage your phone calls in the phone
application. You can send text messages, open applications, go to your
favorite web pages, see your upcoming appointments, and even find
out how many unread email messages you have.
Benefits
•
Stay in touch—you choose how
•
•
Have fun: add wallpaper and
ringtones
•
Save time with shortcuts to your
favorite info
Make or receive calls without
taking your hands off the steering
wheel
47
Y O U R P H O N E
4
1
Press and release Power/End to
wake up the screen.
Turning your
Centro™ smart
device on and off
TIP You can also press any of the quick buttons
or the Applications button to wake up your
Centro screen.
NOTE We use the term phone to describe
the feature of your Centro that lets you
connect to the AT&T network to make and
receive calls and transmit data.
Power/End
Center
The phone and the screen of your Centro
can be turned on and off separately. You
can wake up the screen to use just the
organizer and media applications of your
Centro (such as Contacts, Calendar, Pocket
Tunes™, and Pictures & Videos) without
turning on the phone. Also, when the
screen is turned off, the phone can be on
and ready for you to receive and make
calls.
2
3
Press Center
to turn off Keyguard.
For more info about turning Keyguard on
and off, see Locking your keyboard
Press and release Power/End to turn
off the screen and lock the keyboard.
Waking up the screen and turning it off
TIP You can set how long the screen stays on.
Press Applications, select Preferences,
select Power, and then adjust the Auto-off
after setting.
Wake up the screen and leave the phone
turned off when you want to use only the
organizer features of your Centro—for
example, when you’re on a plane and want
to look at your calendar.
T U R N I N G Y O U R C E N T R O ™ S M A R T D E V I C E O N A N D O F F
49
Y O U R P H O N E
4
Turning your phone on and off
You know your phone is on and that
you’re inside a coverage area when you
go to the Main tab of the Phone
When your phone is on, it is connected to
the AT&T network (provided you are in a
coverage area) so that you can make and
receive phone calls and use wireless
services, such as email, messaging, and
the web browser. During initial setup, your
phone is automatically turned on, so you
can use wireless services right away.
application and you see the Signal
Strength
icon at the top of the
screen.
TIP If you’re outside a coverage area, the
upper-left corner appears blank and the
indicator light flashes red.
If you turn off your phone, you can still use
the organizer features such as Calendar
and Contacts, as well as the media
features such as Pocket Tunes and Pictures
& Videos. You might hear this referred to as
flight mode because you must turn your
phone off when you’re on a plane.
3
Press and hold Power/End again to
turn off your phone.
You know your phone is off when you
go to the Main tab of the Phone
application and you see Phone Off at
the top of the screen.
1
2
Wake up the screen.
Press and hold Power/End to turn on Opening the Phone application
your phone.
Press Phone
to display the Main tab
in the Phone application.
TIP If the Ringer switch is set to Sound On,
you hear a series of tones when you turn your
T U R N I N G Y O U R C E N T R O ™ S M A R T D E V I C E O N A N D O F F
50
Y O U R P H O N E
4
Dialing using the onscreen Dial Pad
Status
icons
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Select the Dial Pad
tab.
Enter the phone number by tapping the
onscreen Dial Pad with the stylus.
TIP Press Backspace to delete numbers
you’ve entered. To cancel the call altogether,
press Phone to return to the Main tab in the
Phone application.
Call Log
Dial Pad
Favorites
Contacts
Main
DID YOU KNOW You can choose which tab
?
appears when you press the Phone button.
application for details. If you change the
default tab, you need to modify the steps in
this chapter accordingly.
Making calls
4
Press Send
to make the call.
There are several ways to make a call. Try
them all to find out which way you like
best.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can paste numbers
directly into the Dial Pad. Copy a number from
another application, press Phone, and select
the Dial Pad tab. Open the Edit menu and
select Paste. Press Send to dial the number.
M A K I N G C A L L S
51
Y O U R P H O N E
4
Dialing using the keyboard
add contacts directly into your Centro (see
Adding a contact), but the fastest way to
enter lots of contacts is to enter them in
your desktop software and then
synchronize to transfer them to your
1
2
Press Phone
.
Press the numbered keys to enter the
phone number. (You don’t need to press
Option.)
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Select the Contacts
tab.
Using the keyboard, start entering one
of the following for the contact you
want to call:
• First name (JOH for John)
• Last name (SMI for Smith)
• First initial and last name (JSM for
John Smith)
3
Press Send to make the call.
TIP After you enter a phone number, you can
also press Center on the 5-way to select
whether to make a phone call or send a text
message to that number.
• First few letters of first and last name
(SM AN for Smilla Anderson)
For example, entering SM would display
Smilla Anderson, John Smith, and
Sally Martin. Entering JSM finds only
John Smith.
Dialing by contact name
You need to have names and numbers in
your contact list before you can make a call
by contact name or phone number. You can
M A K I N G C A L L S
52
Y O U R P H O N E
4
Voice dialing
Text appears
here as you
enter it
You can use the Voice Dialing application to
call people in your Contacts list by saying
their name or number. If the person you are
calling has more than one phone number,
you can specify which number to call.
1
2
Press Applications
.
Select Voice Dial
.
A voice prompts you to “say a
command.”
TIP To restart your search, press Backspace to
delete letters or numbers you’ve entered. Or
press Phone to return to the Main tab in the
Phone application.
3
Do one of the following:
To call a person in your contact list by
saying their name: For example, say,
“Call John Doe.” If a contact has
multiple numbers, you can specify
which number to call. For example, say,
“Call John Doe Home.”
4
5
Highlight the number you want to dial.
Press Send to make the call.
TIP To see more info for a contact, highlight
the name and press Center on the 5-way to
view the address, company, and other details.
To call a number by saying the
individual digits: For example, say,
“Call 408-555-1234.”
DID YOU KNOW
?
If you want to be able to dial a
call from the Main tab in the Phone application
by entering a name or a number, you can
change a setting to do that (see Customizing
M A K I N G C A L L S
53
Y O U R P H O N E
4
Dialing with a speed-dial favorite button
TIP You can see all the contact numbers for
the selected person or business. Highlight a
speed-dial favorite button and press Space
on the keyboard to see alternate phone
numbers if the speed-dial favorite was created
from a contact.
Your Centro comes with a few predefined
speed-dial favorite buttons, but you can
also create your own favorites. See
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Select the Favorites
tab.
4
Press Send
or Center
to make
Use the 5-way
to highlight the
the call.
speed-dial favorite you want.
Dialing from a web page or message
Look for the
icon to distinguish a
speed-dial favorite from other types of
favorites.
Your Centro recognizes most phone
numbers that appear on web pages or in
text, email, or multimedia messages.
TIP To view more favorite buttons, repeatedly
press Down on the 5-way.
1
Select the phone number on the web
page or in the message.
M A K I N G C A L L S
54
Y O U R P H O N E
4
TIP If you can’t use the 5-way or stylus to
highlight and dial a phone number on a web
page or in a message, it means that your
Centro doesn’t recognize the number as a
phone number. You can still use the menus to
copy and paste the number into the Dial Pad.
2
3
Press Center
Number dialog box.
to open the Dial
To select from your call history list:
Select the Call Log tab, highlight the
number you want to call, and then press
Send to dial the number.
Select Dial to make the call.
Redialing a recently called number
To dial the last number: Select the
Main
Send
tab, and then press and hold
to dial the last number you called.
To select from your most recently dialed
numbers: Select the Main tab, press
Send to open the Redial list, highlight
the number you want to call, and then
press Send again to make the call.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can send a text message
from Contacts or your Call Log by highlighting
a number, pressing Center on the 5-way, and
then selecting Message.
M A K I N G C A L L S
55
Y O U R P H O N E
4
To answer a call, do one of the following:
Receiving calls
•
•
Press Send
.
Select Answer.
To receive calls, your phone must be on.
This is different from having only the
on and off). When your phone is off, your
calls go to voicemail.
NOTE Pressing Phone
silences the
ringer, but it does not answer the call.
To ignore a call, do one of the following:
Send the call to voicemail: Press Power/
End or select Ignore.
DID YOU KNOW If you are playing music on
?
your Centro and a call arrives, the music
pauses automatically and resumes when you
hang up or ignore the call.
Send the caller a text message: Select
Ignore with Text. This option sends the
call to voicemail and opens a text message
addressed to the caller.
NOTE Sending text messages to land-line
phones may not be supported.
To silence the phone while it is ringing, do
one of the following:
•
Press any key on your Centro except
Send, Power/End, or the 5-way.
•
Slide the Ringer switch to Sound Off
. This immediately silences all
TIP See a photo of the person calling you!
Learn how to assign a caller ID photo in
system sounds, including the ringer.
R E C E I V I N G C A L L S
56
Y O U R P H O N E
4
Voicemail notification
DID YOU KNOW When you silence the ringer
while it is ringing, you can either answer the
call or let it ring through to voicemail.
?
When you have a new voicemail message,
you are notified with an Alert dialog box.
Using voicemail
Your wireless service includes voicemail.
Keep in mind that airtime and other
charges may apply when you use voicemail
from your phone.
•
To dismiss the Alert dialog box, select
OK.
Setting up voicemail
1
2
Press Phone
.
Press and hold 1 to dial the AT&T
TIP To permanently dismiss the reminder, tap
the blinking bell icon that appears in the
upper-left corner of the screen. This opens the
Alert dialog box and lets you dismiss the alert.
automated voicemail system.
3
Follow the voice prompts to set up your
voicemail.
TIP If you can’t connect to the AT&T voicemail
system, contact AT&T for assistance:
•
To play the message, select Listen.
When you have messages that you have
not listened to, a Voicemail icon also
appears in the title bar of the Phone
application. You can also select this icon to
listen to your voicemail.
• Dial 611 from your Centro.
• Call 1-800-331-0500 from any phone.
U S I N G V O I C E M A I L
57
Y O U R P H O N E
4
Listening to voicemail messages
What can I do when
I’m on a call?
1
2
Press Phone
.
Press and hold 1 to dial the voicemail
system.
When you make or receive a call, Active
Call View appears.
TIP You can also select the Voicemail favorite
button to dial the voicemail system.
Caller’s name
and number
3
Enter your voicemail password using
the keyboard.
Call duration
Call status
TIP You don’t need to press Option to enter
numbers, *, or # during a call.
NOTE If you defined Extra Digits for the
Voicemail favorite button (see Editing a
favorite button for details), you can select
this button to enter your password.
Button label
TIP If the screen dims during a call, press any
key except Send or Power/End to restore the
screen brightness.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can set how long the
screen stays at full brightness during phone
details.
W H A T C A N
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N
A
C A L L ?
58
Y O U R P H O N E
4
Use the 5-way
or the stylus to select
Lets you make another call while
the onscreen buttons. Here’s what the
buttons do:
the first call is on hold; see Making
a second call for details. For info on
handling a second incoming call,
Turns on the speakerphone, which
means that you and everybody
around you can hear the call. (The
caller can hear you as well.) The
advantage is that you can check
your calendar, look up contact info,
take notes, and use other features
during a call. This button is not
available when you use a headset.
Opens the Dial Pad so you can use
it to dial additional numbers, such as
an extension or a response to a
voice prompt.
Dials any extra digits (such as a
password or an extension) that you
assigned to a speed-dial favorite
button. See Defining favorite
buttons for information on defining
extra digits. This button disappears
after you select it to dial the
numbers.
Turns off the speakerphone when it
is on.
Replaces the Speakerphone button
®
when you use a Bluetooth
hands-free device. Select this
button to stop using the hands-free
device and switch to holding your
Centro to your ear.
Mutes the microphone so that you
and the noise around you can’t be
heard on the other end. The call
status changes to Muted. When
you want to speak, be sure to select
the Mute button again.
Puts a call on hold, and the call
status changes to On Hold. To take
the call off hold, select this button
again.
W H A T C A N
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N
A
C A L L ?
59
Y O U R P H O N E
4
1
(Optional) If you want to continue
talking while viewing another
application, select Speakerphone or
connect a headset (see Using a
TIP Do you accidentally press onscreen
buttons when you’re on a call? You can disable
the screen’s touch-sensitive feature during
Remember: To manage an active call when
the touchscreen is disabled, use the hardware
buttons on your Centro.
2
3
Press Applications
.
Select the icon for the application you
want to open.
Ending a call
4
When you’re ready to leave the app,
open another app or press Phone
to return to Active Call View.
Do one of the following:
•
•
Press Power/End
.
Press the button on the headset (if the
headset is attached).
DID YOU KNOW You can press Phone to toggle
?
between Active Call View and the Main tab in
the Phone app, so you can access other tabs,
such as Contacts and Favorites, during a call.
Switching applications during a call
You can use your organizer apps and other
applications while you’re talking on the
phone; so go ahead and check your
calendar, or go to Memos and enter the
driving directions your caller is giving you.
You can even send text messages while
you’re on a call.
Saving phone numbers
When you hang up a call with a number
that is not in your Contacts list, you are
prompted to add the number to your
Contacts list.
NOTE What you can’t do, however, is
make a data connection while on a call.
This means that you can’t browse the web
or send or receive email or multimedia
messages.
W H A T C A N
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N
A
C A L L ?
60
Y O U R P H O N E
4
If you don’t add a number right away, follow
these steps to add it later.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Press Phone
Select the Call Log
Highlight the number you want to save.
Press Menu
.
tab.
.
Select Add Contact.
Select New to create a new contact, or
select Add to add this number to an
existing contact.
TIP You can turn the Add New Number prompt
on and off. In Contacts, open the Options
menu, and select Preferences. To turn this
option on, check the Ask to add unknown
phone numbers after calls box. To turn this
option off, uncheck this box.
7
Enter the information for the entry, and
then select Done.
Making a second call
You can make a second call while your first
call is still active. You can then switch
between two independent conversations,
or you can join several calls in a
•
To create a new contact entry for this
number, select Create a New Contact,
and enter the contact’s info.
•
•
•
To add this number to an existing
contact entry, select Add to a Contact.
1
Dial the first number and wait until the
person answers.
To decline adding this number, select
Cancel.
2
Put the first call on hold by pressing
To disable the Add New Number
prompt, check the Don’t ask me this
again box, and then select Cancel.
Send or selecting Hold
Select Add Call
Dial the second number.
.
3
4
.
W H A T C A N
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N
A
C A L L ?
61
Y O U R P H O N E
4
NOTE To dial the second number, you can
Receiving a second call (call waiting)
use any of the methods described in
When you are on a call, you can receive a
second call and have separate
conversations with each caller. When the
second call comes in, you hear a call
waiting tone and the Call Waiting dialog
box appears. You can do any of the
following to handle the second call:
5
6
When the Dial another call prompt
appears, select Yes.
Select Swap
to switch between
the two calls.
•
To place the current call on hold and
answer the new call, press Send or
select Answer.
•
•
To send the new call to voicemail, select
Ignore.
To send the new call to voicemail and
send the caller a text message, select
Ignore with Text.
NOTE Sending text messages to land-line
phones may not be supported.
7
To end the active call, press Power/End
.
•
•
To hang up the current call and answer
the new call, press Power/End and
then press Send
DID YOU KNOW When you hang up one call,
you can continue your conversation with the
remaining call.
?
.
To switch between the original call and
the second call you answered, select
Swap
or press Send
.
W H A T C A N
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N
A
C A L L ?
62
Y O U R P H O N E
4
Making a conference call
4
To end all the calls at once, make sure
the conference is the active call, and
then press Power/End
You can join a total of five other calls in a
conference call, provided that your network
and service plan include 6-way
.
TIP If you want to hold a separate, “sidebar”
conversation with one of the people on a
conference call, you can extract that call from
the conference. Select Extract Call (the
onscreen button on the far right), and when
the list of callers appears, select the call you
want to extract. The conference call remains
on hold while you speak privately on the
extracted call.
conferencing. Please contact AT&T for
more information. Additional charges may
apply and minutes in your mobile account
may be deducted for each call included in
the conference call.
1
While the first call is active, make a
second call.
2
Select Conference
. This joins you
and the two calls in a conference call.
Forwarding all calls
You can forward all your calls to another
telephone number. You can also selectively
forward certain calls (see Forwarding calls
under certain conditions). Please check
with AT&T about availability and pricing of
forwarded calls, as additional charges may
apply.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Press Menu
.
3
To add more calls to the conference,
select Hold , dial another number,
Select Options, and then select Call
Preferences.
and then select Conference
to add
the new call.
W H A T C A N
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N
A
C A L L ?
63
Y O U R P H O N E
4
TIP After you set the number you want to
forward all your calls to, the call forwarding
icon appears in the title bar (see What are all
those icons?). We also recommend that you
call your Centro to confirm that your call
forwarding settings work properly.
TIP To turn off forwarding for all calls, select
Off from the Forward all calls pick list.
4
Select the Forward all calls pick list.
Forwarding calls under certain conditions
• If the forwarding number appears in
the pick list, select the number.
You can forward calls to another number
when the line is busy, a call is unanswered,
your Centro is off, or you are outside a
coverage area.
• If the forwarding number does not
appear in the pick list, select Edit
Numbers, and then select New.
Enter a forwarding number, including
the area code and country code if
they are different from your mobile
phone number. Select OK.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Call
Preferences.
5
Select the number you just entered,
select OK, and then select OK again.
4
5
Select the Forward all calls pick list and
select Off.
Select any of the following pick lists:
When busy: Forwards calls if the phone
is busy.
Not answered: Forwards calls if you do
not answer.
W H A T C A N
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N
A
C A L L ?
64
Y O U R P H O N E
4
Off/No service: Forwards calls when
your Centro is not connected to a
mobile network.
4
Select Totals from the Record menu.
6
7
If the forwarding number appears in the
pick list, select the number. If the
forwarding number does not appear in
the pick list, select Edit Numbers and
then select New. Enter a forwarding
number, and select OK. Select the
number you just entered.
Select OK, and then select OK again.
5
6
(Optional) To reset the counters to zero,
select Reset Counters.
Select Done.
How many minutes
have I used?
Entering names and
phone numbers
1
2
3
Press Phone
Select the Call Log
Press Menu
.
tab.
.
Contacts is the application in which you
enter information about the people you
want to stay in contact with. You can get to
this info from the Phone application, to dial
phone numbers and create favorites, and
from the Messaging and email
applications, to send messages. When you
H O W M A N Y M I N U T E S H A V E
I
U S E D ?
65
Y O U R P H O N E
4
create a contact, you can also assign a
6
Do any of the following:
photo and ringtone ID to that contact, so
you know when they call you.
Add a caller ID photo: Select the
Picture box. (See Assigning a caller ID
photo for more info.)
Adding a contact
Add a caller ID ringtone: Select the
caller ID ringtone for more info.)
1
2
3
4
Press Phone
Select the Contacts
Press Menu
.
tab.
.
Insert a pause when dialing a
number: Enter a comma ( , ) between
digits in a phone number to insert a
one-second pause. To add a two-second
pause, enter a p.
Select New Contact from the Record
menu.
5
Use the 5-way
to move between
fields as you enter info.
Display a number pad that waits for
you to enter a number: Enter a w
between digits in a phone number,
where you want the prompt to appear.
When the number is dialed, the Extra
Digits button appears in the active call
screen. When you select this button,
the digits following the w are
automatically dialed.
Place the entry in a category or mark
with private entries for more info.)
DID YOU KNOW If you add a symbol at the
?
beginning of a contact’s last name, such as
#Smith, the contact appears at the top of your
contact list.
Add a note to an entry: Select Note
.
E N T E R I N G N A M E S A N D P H O N E N U M B E R S
66
Y O U R P H O N E
4
Display additional fields for this
contact: Select Plus
5
Select Edit, make changes to the entry
as necessary, and then select Done.
.
7
After you enter all the information,
select Done.
Assigning a caller ID photo
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
TIP Import contacts from your SIM card
quickly and easily. In the Contacts list, press
Menu and then select Import from SIM from
the Record menu.
Select the Contacts
tab.
Open the contact you want to add the
photo to (see Viewing or changing
4
5
Select Edit.
Viewing or changing contact information
Select the Picture box and do one of
the following:
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Select the Contacts
tab.
• Select Camera, take a photo, and
then press Center
photo to this contact.
Begin entering one of the following for
the contact you want to view or edit:
to add the
• First name (JOH for John)
• Last name (SMI for Smith)
• Select Photos and select an existing
photo that you want to assign to this
contact.
• First initial and last name (JSM for
John Smith)
4
Select the name of the entry you want
to open.
TIP To edit the entries on your SIM card, you
must either import them into Contacts or
press Applications, select SIM Book, and
edit them in the phone book on your SIM card.
E N T E R I N G N A M E S A N D P H O N E N U M B E R S
67
Y O U R P H O N E
4
2
3
Select the Contacts
tab.
To open the contact entry for editing,
select the name of the contact to whom
you want to give a caller ID ringtone
4
5
Select Edit.
Select the Ringtone pick list and select
a tone for this contact entry.
6
Select Done.
DID YOU KNOW If you assign pictures to your
?
contacts in Microsoft Outlook or
Palm® Desktop software and you install the
desktop software from the Getting Started
CD, the pictures are automatically added to
your contact entries on your Centro when you
sync. If you use third-party synchronization
software, picture sync may not be supported.
Check with the software developer for
information.
6
Select Done.
TIP You can assign a ringtone to an entire
category of contacts. For example, use a
special ringtone for categories such as Family,
Work, or Golf Buddies. In the Contacts list,
select the category pick list in the upper-left
corner and select Edit Categories. Select the
category, and then select Edit. Select the
ringtone on the Edit Category screen.
Assigning a caller ID ringtone
Caller ID ringtones can let you know who is
calling before you even look at your Centro.
This is a great way to identify calls from
important people in your life and to screen
calls that you’d prefer not to answer.
1
Press Phone
.
E N T E R I N G N A M E S A N D P H O N E N U M B E R S
68
Y O U R P H O N E
4
Customizing Contacts
Deleting a contact
1
2
3
4
Press Phone
Select the Contacts
Press Menu
.
1
2
Select the Contacts
tab.
tab.
Highlight the contact you want to
delete.
.
3
4
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
Select Delete Contact from the Record
menu, and then select OK.
5
Set any of the following options:
Remember Last Category: Sets
whether Contacts opens to the last
category you selected.
Creating a business card for beaming
1
Create a new contact and enter your
own business card info.
Show SIM Phonebook: Sets whether
SIM Phonebook appears as an option in
the category pick list. When you check
this box, you can view entries in the
phone book on your SIM card.
2
Open the contact entry containing your
business card info.
3
4
Press Menu
.
Select Business Card on the Record
menu.
Ask to add unknown phone numbers
after calls: Sets whether you are
prompted to add phone numbers that
are not in your Contacts list after a call.
You can add unknown numbers to an
existing contact or create a new contact
entry.
TIP After you create your business card, you
can beam it to another device with an IR
port—provided the device supports beaming
with Palm OS® devices. Go to Contacts or to
the Main tab in the Phone application, open
the Record menu, and then select Beam
Business Card.
List By: Sets whether the Contacts list
is sorted by last name or company
name.
E N T E R I N G N A M E S A N D P H O N E N U M B E R S
69
Y O U R P H O N E
4
Viewing your SIM Phonebook
Defining favorite
buttons
1
2
3
4
Press Phone
Select the Contacts
Press Menu
.
tab.
.
You can set an unlimited number of favorite
buttons for quick access to the following
common tasks:
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
5
Make sure the Show SIM Phonebook
box is checked.
•
•
•
•
Dialing a phone number (speed-dial)
Opening an application
6
7
Select OK.
In the Contacts list, select the category
pick list at the top of the screen and
select SIM Phonebook.
Accessing a web page
Addressing a message (text, MMS, or
email)
•
Accessing voicemail (preset on your
Centro)
TIP If you imported contacts from your SIM
card to Contacts, you may want to uncheck
the Show SIM Phonebook box to avoid
seeing duplicate entries.
TIP The predefined Bill Balance and My
Minutes favorites are AT&T services. If you
have questions about these services, please
contact AT&T customer service.
TIP Need to copy a contact to your phone
book on your SIM card? In Contacts, select
the contact you want to copy, open the
Record menu, and then select Export to
SIM.
D E F I N I N G F A V O R I T E B U T T O N S
70
Y O U R P H O N E
4
5
Enter a label for the favorite:
• If the entry is for an existing contact,
select Lookup. Enter the last name of
the contact. When the name appears,
select the phone number you want.
Select Add.
• If the entry is for a new contact, enter
the label, press Down , and enter
the number.
DID YOU KNOW If you’re upgrading from a
?
Centro 600/650/680/700p/755p, most of your
favorites should transfer from your old Centro
along with your other info. However, you may
need to rearrange the order in which your
favorites appear by opening the Record menu
and then selecting Organize Favorites. For
more info about upgrading, see Upgrading
You can define additional digits to dial,
such as a password or extension.
Creating a speed-dial favorite button
1
2
3
4
Press Phone
Select the Favorites
Press Menu
.
Insert a pause when dialing a number:
tab.
• Enter a comma ( , ) between digits in
a phone number to insert a
one-second pause.
.
Select New Favorite on the Record
menu.
• To add a two-second pause, enter a p.
• To enter a pause for user input, enter
a w followed by the extra digits you
D E F I N I N G F A V O R I T E B U T T O N S
71
Y O U R P H O N E
4
want to dial. To dial these numbers,
5
6
Select the Type pick list and select
Application, Message, Email, or Web
Link.
select the Extra Digits button that
appears in Active Call View (see What
Enter a label for the favorite and enter
any other necessary information on
the screen.
6
(Optional) Enter a Quick Key.
KEY TERM Quick Key A letter that you can
press and hold to activate a favorite from any
tab in the Phone app. For example, create a
speed-dial button for your mother’s number
and enter the letter M for “Mom” as the
Quick Key. Then when you want to call her, go
to the Phone app and press and hold M. Your
Centro dials the number.
7
8
(Optional) Enter a Quick Key.
Select OK.
TIP When creating a Message or Email
favorite, you can enter multiple addresses;
simply separate each address with a comma.
This is an easy way to send messages to a
group of people.
7
Select OK.
Editing a favorite button
DID YOU KNOW You can assign a special
ringtone for a contact. See Assigning a caller
ID ringtone for details.
?
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Select the Favorites
tab.
Highlight the favorite button you want to
edit.
Creating other types of favorite buttons
4
5
Press Menu
.
1
2
3
4
Press Phone
Select the Favorites
Press Menu
.
Select Edit Favorite on the Record
menu.
tab.
.
6
After you make your changes, select
OK.
Select New Favorite on the Record
menu.
D E F I N I N G F A V O R I T E B U T T O N S
72
Y O U R P H O N E
4
Using a hands-free
TIP To arrange your favorites, open the Record
menu and select Organize Favorites.
Highlight the favorite you want to move, and
then press and hold Option + Up or Down to
move the button to another position. Select
Done.
device
If you need to use your phone while driving
and this is safe and permitted in your area,
use a phone headset or car kit (sold
separately) for hands-free operation. Using
a hands-free device also makes it easy to
check your calendar, look up contact info,
take notes, and use other features during a
call. You can also listen to stereo music or
audio on your stereo headset or car
speakers.
Deleting a favorite button
TIP Some favorites, such as voicemail, cannot
be deleted. If a favorite can’t be deleted, the
Delete button does not appear on the screen.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Select the Favorites
tab.
Your Centro is compatible with the
following types of hands-free devices that
are sold separately:
Highlight the favorite button you want to
delete.
4
5
Press Menu
.
•
Most wired headsets and car kits with a
2.5mm connector (3-pin or 4-pin)
Select Edit Favorite on the Record
menu.
•
Wireless headsets and car kits enabled
with Bluetooth® 1.1 or 1.2 wireless
technology
6
7
Select Delete.
Select OK.
TIP The headset designed for Treo 180/270/
300 is not compatible with your Centro.
U S I N G
A
H A N D S - F R E E D E V I C E
73
Y O U R P H O N E
4
Check the specifications for your
Once you set up a partnership with a
hands-free device to confirm compatibility. Bluetooth hands-free device, you can
When in doubt, ask the manufacturer if the communicate with that device whenever it
product is compatible with your Centro. To is turned on and within range. Bluetooth
view a list of compatible Bluetooth
hands-free devices, go to go.palm.com/
range is up to 30 feet in optimum
environmental conditions. Performance
and range may be reduced by physical
obstacles, radio interference from nearby
electronic equipment, and other factors.
TIP To listen to music in stereo, you can
purchase the Palm 2-in-1 Stereo Headset. If
you want to use a stereo headset with a
3.5mm connector, you need to purchase a
stereo adapter. Visit go.palm.com/centro-att/
for more info on audio accessories.
TIP If you hear a headset buzz or experience
poor microphone performance, your headset
may be incompatible with your Centro.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Prepare your
hands-free device to accept a Bluetooth
connection. See the documentation that
came with your hands-free device for
instructions.
Connecting to a Bluetooth® hands-free
device
KEY TERM Partnership Two devices—for
example, your Centro and a hands-free
device—that can connect because each
device finds the same passkey on the other
device. Once you form a partnership with a
device, you don’t need to enter a passkey to
connect with that device again. Partnership is
also known as paired relationship, pairing,
trusted device, and trusted pair.
1
Press Applications
and select
Bluetooth or tap the Bluetooth
icon in the title bar.
2
Select Bluetooth On.
NOTE The Bluetooth icon changes from
gray to blue to let you know that Bluetooth
technology is turned on.
U S I N G
A
H A N D S - F R E E D E V I C E
74
Y O U R P H O N E
4
6
Follow the onscreen instructions to
create a partnership with the specific
hands-free device. When prompted,
enter a passkey.
IMPORTANT Some hands-free devices
have a predefined passkey. If your device
has a predefined passkey, you can find it in
the documentation for that device. Other
devices provide a screen where you enter
a passkey that you make up. In either case,
you must use the same passkey on both
your Centro and your hands-free device.
We recommend that, where possible, you
make up a passkey of 16 alphanumeric
characters (letters and numerals only) to
improve the security of your Centro. The
longer the passkey, the more difficult it is
for the passkey to be deciphered.
3
(Optional) Enter a device name that
identifies your Centro when it is
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.
NOTE Use the same device name for all
your Bluetooth connections. If you change
the device name, you need to recreate any
partnerships you have already created.
4
5
Select Setup Devices.
Select Hands-free Setup.
7
After you finish setting up the device,
select Done to return to Trusted
Devices View.
NOTE For some car kits, you need to
initiate a Bluetooth connection from your
Centro to complete the partnership
process. To do this, highlight the car kit in
Trusted Devices View, press Menu
,
and then select Connect.
U S I N G
A
H A N D S - F R E E D E V I C E
75
Y O U R P H O N E
4
8
(Optional) Enable advanced hands-free
features by pressing the multifunction
button (MFB) on the hands-free device.
TIP If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free
device and you want to return to the earpiece
or a wired headset during a call, select Cancel
Bluetooth in Active Call View. To return the
call to the hands-free device, open the
Options menu and select Connect
Bluetooth.
You can tell that the connection is
successful when you see a light-blue
headset icon in the title bar of the Phone
application. You can now use your Centro
with the Bluetooth hands-free device.
The features of your hands-free device vary
by model. Check the documentation for
your hands-free device for details about
these features. Your Centro can support
the following actions, provided that your
hands-free device also supports them:
Using a Bluetooth hands-free device
After you create a partnership with your
Bluetooth hands-free device and you turn it
on within range (up to 30 feet), the Centro
automatically routes all calls to the
hands-free device instead of to the
earpiece on your Centro. When a call
comes in, your Centro rings and the
hands-free device beeps. Even if you
answer the call on your Centro, the call
goes to the hands-free device. If you prefer
to route calls to the earpiece on your
Centro, you can change the settings on
your Centro to do this; see Customizing
device for details.
•
•
•
Dial a call
Answer an incoming call
Hang up a call and answer a call-waiting
call
•
Place a call on hold and answer a
call-waiting call
•
•
Hang up a single call
Transfer an outgoing call from the
earpiece on your Centro to the
hands-free device
•
Ignore an incoming call
U S I N G
A
H A N D S - F R E E D E V I C E
76
Y O U R P H O N E
4
•
Redial the last number you called from
the hands-free device
To choose between the earpiece on
your Centro and your hands-free
device on a call-by-call basis: Uncheck
the Always route calls to handsfree
box. When the phone rings, you can
answer the call with your hands-free
device by pressing the multifunction
button on your hands-free device, or you
can answer the call with the earpiece on
your Centro by using the controls on
DID YOU KNOW If you have more than one
?
Bluetooth hands-free device, the last one you
connected to becomes the active device. To
switch between devices, turn off the active
device before you try to connect to the other
device.
Customizing advanced settings for your
hands-free device
4
Select Done.
You can set whether your hands-free
device automatically answers calls,
provided the device supports this feature.
Customizing phone
settings
1
Press Applications
Prefs
and select
.
2
3
Select Hands-free.
Do one of the following:
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can download any
To send all calls to your hands-free
device: Check the Always route calls
to handsfree box. Select the Auto
answer pick list and select whether you
want your hands-free device to
compatible ringtone directly to your Centro
can also download ringtones to your computer
and then email them to your Centro.
automatically answer incoming calls and
how quickly it answers.
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S
77
Y O U R P H O N E
4
Selecting ringtones
ring to play softly and then increase to
full volume the longer it rings.
You can set various tones for various types
of incoming calls.
8
Select a ringtone from the pick list to
identify each of the following:
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Known Caller: An incoming call from
someone in your Contacts or Favorites.
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Sound
Unknown Caller: An incoming call from
someone identified by caller ID who is
not in your Contacts or Favorites. This
includes callers who have blocked their
caller ID.
Preferences.
4
Select the Application pick list and
select Ring Tones.
9
Select Done.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can assign a ringtone to a
contact or to an entire category of contacts.
Creating and managing ringtones
You can also record sounds and use them
as ringtones.
5
6
Select the Volume pick list and select
the volume level.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Select the Vibrate pick list and select
when you want your Centro to vibrate
for an incoming call.
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Sound
Preferences.
7
(Optional) Uncheck the Escalate ring
tone volume box if you do not want the
4
Select Manage.
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S
78
Y O U R P H O N E
4
5
Do one of the following:
• To record a sound, select New.
• To play a sound, select it with the
5-way
• To delete a sound, highlight it and
press Backspace
.
.
• To send a sound, highlight it and
select Send.
6
Select Done twice.
5
6
Select the Volume pick list and select
the volume level.
TIP You can also create a new sound by
selecting New in Sound & Alerts Preferences.
Select the Vibrate pick list and select
when you want your Centro to vibrate
for a phone alert.
Selecting Phone alert tones
7
Select an alert tone from the pick list for
each of the following:
You can set various tones for various types
of alerts.
Voicemail Alert: Plays when you have
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
new voicemail.
Press Menu
.
Coverage in/out: Plays when you move
into or out of a coverage area.
Select Options, and then select Sound
Preferences.
8
Select Done.
4
Select the Application pick list and
select Phone Alerts.
Adjusting the call volume
While a call is in progress, press the
Volume button on the side of your Centro
to adjust the call volume.
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S
79
Y O U R P H O N E
4
•
•
To increase the volume, press the upper
half of the Volume button.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Press Menu
.
To decrease the volume, press the
lower half of the Volume button.
Select Options, and then select Phone
Display Options.
4
Set any of the following options:
Wallpaper: Sets the wallpaper that
appears on the Main tab in the Phone
application. To change the wallpaper,
select the thumbnail image and then
select an image to use as wallpaper.
Volume
Side button
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can also set the
background for Agenda View in Calendar. See
for details.
Adjusting ringer volume
When a call is not in progress and music is
not playing, press the Volume button on
the side of your Centro to adjust the ringer
volume, and then press the Side button to
confirm your selection.
Fade: Adjusts the intensity level of the
wallpaper image.
Typing…: Sets whether typing in the
Main tab in the Phone app displays the
Dial Pad and enters numbers you want
to dial, or whether it displays the
Contacts tab and starts a contacts
search.
Customizing the Main tab in the Phone
application
Phone Display Options let you customize
the appearance and entry mode of the
Main tab in the Phone application.
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S
80
Y O U R P H O N E
4
Setting your dialing preferences
TIP If you select the Typing starts contacts
search option, you can still enter a phone
number from the Main tab in the Phone app. If
you start typing digit keys that can be a phone
number, the device automatically switches to
the Dial Pad and looks for the phone number.
Dialing preferences let you assign a prefix
to your phone numbers. For example, you
can automatically dial a 1 before all 10-digit
phone numbers. You can add a different
prefix based on the length of the phone
number.
Show Calendar event: Sets whether
the current event from the Calendar
application appears in the Main tab in
the Phone app. When this option is
enabled, you can then select this event
to jump to the Calendar app.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Dial
Preferences.
4
Set any of the following options:
Dialing from North America: Formats
phone numbers using North American
conventions (XXX-XXX-XXXX).
Default View: Sets the tab that appears
when you press Phone
.
Always dial +1 in front of the area
code: Adds a +1 in front of 10-digit
phone numbers. This option is available
only when Dialing from North America
is enabled.
To 7 digit numbers: Adds a prefix to
7-digit numbers. For example, enter
your own area code to automatically add
your area code when you dial local
numbers.
5
Select OK.
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S
81
Y O U R P H O N E
4
To (6), (5), (4), digit numbers: Adds a
Using TTY
prefix to numbers that are only six, five,
or four numerals long. For example, if all
the phone numbers in your office have
the 408 area code and a 555 exchange,
followed by a 4-digit extension, select 4
and enter the prefix 408555. To call a
colleague, simply dial your colleague’s
4-digit extension; your Centro
automatically dials the rest and makes
the call. You can also create contact
entries with just the extension number
and then dial the number from your
Contacts list.
A TTY (also known as TDD or text
telephone) is a telecommunications device
that allows people who are deaf or hard of
hearing, or who have speech or language
disabilities, to communicate by telephone.
Your Centro is compatible with select TTY
devices. You can connect a TTY/TDD
machine to your Centro through the
headset jack, but you cannot use your
headset jack with a headset while this
mode is enabled. Please check with the
manufacturer of your TTY device for
connectivity information and to ensure that
the TTY device supports digital wireless
transmission.
5
Select OK.
Manually selecting the wireless network
To use TTY, you may need to make
additional arrangements with AT&T. Please
contact the AT&T customer service
department for more information.
When traveling outside the U.S.,
depending on SIM card setting, you may be
able to search for other wireless network
services in your current location.
1
2
3
4
Press Phone
.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Select the Dial Pad
tab.
Press Menu
.
Enter #*889 (TTY).
From the Options menu, select Select
Network.
Press Send
.
4
5
Select another network, if available.
Select OK.
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S
82
Y O U R P H O N E
4
5
When a message appears indicating
that TTY is enabled, select OK. To
disable TTY, repeat these steps.
AT&T
Your phone is on and you are in
an AT&T coverage area. If you
are outside a coverage area, “No
Service” appears instead. When
you turn off your phone, Phone
Off appears.
TIP A red T appears at the top of the Phone
screen to indicate that TTY is enabled.
Call forwarding is active.
Your phone is on. The bars
display the signal strength. The
stronger the signal, the more
bars that appear. If you are
outside a coverage area, no bars
appear.
What are all those
icons?
You can monitor the status of several items
using icons in the title bar in the Phone
application:
Your phone is on and a GPRS or
EDGE network is within range,
but you are not actively
transmitting data. You can still
make and receive calls.
W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?
83
Y O U R P H O N E
4
Your phone is on and a GPRS or
EDGE data connection is active.
You may not be able to receive
calls when you are actively
transmitting data. If you make a
call, the data transmission is
automatically interrupted, and
you must manually resume the
data connection when you end
the call.
This icon replaces the Bluetooth
icon when your Centro is
connected to a Bluetooth
hands-free device. This icon
appears in dark blue when a call
is in progress and in light blue
when a call is not in progress.
This icon replaces the Bluetooth
icon when your Centro is
connected to your computer
using a dial-up networking (DUN)
connection. See Connecting your
You have new voicemail
messages. You can select this
icon to retrieve your messages.
You have a new alert, such as a
Calendar alarm or a new text
message. To view the alert,
Your battery is partially drained.
When the battery drains to 20%
of its capacity, the icon changes
from blue to red. At 10% of its
capacity, you begin to receive
warning messages, and at 5% of
its capacity, the Centro beeps (if
the Ringer switch is set to Sound
On) and the icon changes from
red to clear.
press and hold Center
or
select the icon. See Viewing and
The Bluetooth wireless
technology icon appears in gray
when this feature is off, in blue
when this feature is on, and in
reverse blue when your Centro is
communicating with another
Bluetooth device.
W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?
84
Y O U R P H O N E
4
Your battery is being charged.
The lightning bolt turns from red
to green when the battery is fully
charged and your Centro remains
connected to the charger.
You are available for Push to Talk
calls. Your Ringer switch is set to
Sound On and you
automatically hear PTT calls.
Your Ringer switch is set to
Your battery is fully charged and
your Centro is not connected to
the charger.
Sound Off
. When a PTT call
comes in, you get an alert. You
can choose whether to answer
or ignore the PTT call.
You have new text or multimedia
messages. The number next to
the icon indicates the number of
unread messages in your Inbox.
You can select this icon to
You can make PTT calls, but you
cannot receive them.
You cannot make or receive PTT
calls.
retrieve your messages.
You have a pending PTT invitation
and have not yet responded.
You have new email messages.
The number next to the icon
indicates the number of unread
messages in your Inbox. If you
set up multiple email accounts
on your Centro, this number
reflects only the account that you
most recently accessed. You can
select this icon to retrieve your
messages.
W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?
85
Y O U R P H O N E
4
KEY TERM GPRS (General Packet Radio
Service) A mobile connectivity technology
that provides persistent data connections.
(Additional charges may apply.)
KEY TERM EDGE (Enhanced Data rate for GSM
Evolution) An enhanced version of GPRS
that delivers data speeds that are up to three
times faster than standard GPRS connections.
(Additional charges may apply.)
DID YOU KNOW You can tap the Bluetooth
?
icon to quickly turn Bluetooth wireless
features on and off.
TIP To display the remaining battery power,
tap the battery icon at the top of the screen.
W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?
86
CHAPTER
5
Your email and other
messages
You already know how efficient email and messaging are for
staying in touch. Now your Palm® Centro™ smart device brings
you a new level of convenience: email on the go. Enjoy the
ease and speed of communicating with friends, family, and
colleagues anywhere you can access the AT&T data network.
You can send and receive attachments as well. And keep the
Messaging app in mind for when you need to send a short text
message to a mobile phone number—especially handy when
you’re in a meeting that’s running late.
Benefits
•
Access email on the go
•
Save messages from your
computer to view at a convenient
time
•
Send and receive photos, sound
files, Word and Excel files, and
more
In this chapter
Xpress Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Instant Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
Which email
application should I
use?
KEY TERM Email provider The service you
use to send and receive email. Your email
provider’s name appears between the @
symbol and the dot in your email address.
Gmail, for example, is an email provider; so
are AOL and Earthlink.
KEY TERM Email application It’s not an email
provider, but an application on your Centro,
that gives you a way to view and manage
email. An email application just transfers
messages from an account that you have
already set up with a provider.
Your Centro includes two email
applications: the VersaMail® application
(called Email in Applications view) and the
Xpress Mail application. You can access
both personal and work email from Xpress
Mail. You can also access web-based
email, like Yahoo! Mail or Hotmail, from the
web browser on your Centro.
NOTE You must activate data services on
your AT&T account before you can use
email on your Centro.
W H I C H E M A I L A P P L I C A T I O N S H O U L D
I
U S E ?
89
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
Then choose this app…
If you want to…
Access an email account that’s set up on your Mac
computer
x
Check fee-based Internet mail, such as Yahoo! Mail Plus
x
x
x
x
Access email from an existing account without extra
software or account sign-up
Access Contacts on your device to address email
messages
x
x
x
Use the AT&T Xpress Mail website to check email from
multiple email addresses, from any computer connected
to the Internet
Access email from up to three email accounts
Access email from up to eight email accounts
x
x
x
x
Work with email messages when you’re not connected to
the Internet (for example, when you’re on a plane)
x
x
x
Access your corporate directory to address email
messages
x
Sync your email and organizer info with your company’s
Exchange server
x
W H I C H E M A I L A P P L I C A T I O N S H O U L D
I
U S E ?
90
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
Then choose this app…
If you want to…
Push your email and organizer information from your
company’s Exchange server using Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync
x
Sync your email with your company’s Domino server
x
x
x
x
Use the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) while
sending and receiving email
Use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) while sending and
receiving messages
x
W H I C H E M A I L A P P L I C A T I O N S H O U L D
I
U S E ?
91
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
The VersaMail®
application
Notes server, or a Microsoft MAPI
server.
2
If your email provider is listed in the
following table, skip to Setting up
Before you can use VersaMail, you need to
enter your email account settings. If you
have multiple email accounts, you must
enter settings for each email account.
Adelphia
Airmail.net
AOL
Gmail
HughesNet
Juno
After you enter your email account
settings, see the User Guide for the
VersaMail Application on the Getting
Started CD for info on sending and
receiving messages and customizing your
VersaMail settings.
Apple.Mac
Mail.com
Mediacom
NetZero
AT&T (mMode
& Worldnet)
Bell South
Qwest
(select areas
How do I get started?
Cablevision
Charter
RCN
1
If either of the following is true, read the
User Guide for the VersaMail
SBC
(select areas)
Application on the Getting Started CD:
Comcast
CompuServe
Concentric
Covad
Speakeasy
Sprint
• You used the VersaMail application on
your previous Palm OS® device, and
you want to transfer those settings to
your Centro.
USA.net
Verizon DSL
Yahoo!
• You plan to use VersaMail to access
an email account on a Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync server, a Lotus
Cox
(East,Central, &
West)
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
92
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
3
If your email provider’s name is not
listed, you need to obtain the following
info from your system administrator or
• Mail protocol: POP, IMAP, or Outlook
Mail (EAS)
• Incoming and outgoing mail server
names, such as mail.myisp.com
3
4
Press Menu
.
Select Accounts, and then select
Account Setup.
• Incoming and outgoing mail server
port numbers, such as 110 (incoming
POP), 143 (incoming IMAP), or 25
(outgoing POP or IMAP)
5
6
Select New.
Enter the email address for your email
account. Your email address includes
your username, which usually appears
before the @ symbol in your email
address.
• (If necessary) Security settings: APOP,
ESMTP, SSL
Setting up VersaMail to work with
common providers
1
Press Applications
Email
and select
.
2
If this is the first time you are setting up
VersaMail, you are asked if you want to
continue with account setup after you
open the application. Select Continue
and go to step 6.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
93
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
7
8
In the Password field, enter your email
account password.
IMPORTANT Do not select HotSync on
this screen. Doing so may prevent the
VersaMail application from working
correctly.
If the VersaMail application can obtain
your email account settings based on
your username and password, the Next
button changes to Done. Select Done.
NOTE If the Next button does not change
to Done, you need to follow the next
TIP To enter settings for another email
account, open the Accounts menu and select
Account Setup.
3
4
Press Menu
.
Select Accounts, and then select
Account Setup.
Setting up VersaMail to work with other
providers
1
Press Applications
Email
and select
.
2
If this is the first time you are setting up
VersaMail, you are asked if you want to
continue with account setup after you
open the application. Select Continue
and go to step 5.
5
Select New.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
94
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
6
Enter the email address for your email
account. Your email address includes
your username, which usually appears
before the @ symbol in your email
address.
10 Enter the username you use to access
your email.
TIP Your username can be either the part of
your email address appearing before the @
symbol or your entire email address. Check
with your email provider if you are not sure
what username to enter.
7
In the Password field, enter your email
account password.
8
9
Select Next.
Select the Mail Type pick list, and then
select POP, IMAP, or Outlook Mail
(EAS) (based on the info you received
from your system administrator or ISP).
11 Enter the names of your incoming and
outgoing mail servers.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
95
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
TIP You can also select Advanced to set more
options for incoming and outgoing messages.
13 Select Done.
DID YOU KNOW
?
Advanced settings include the
Reset Advanced Settings button. You can
select this button to reset your advanced
settings to their initial state. This is useful
when you want to restore your initial settings
but you can’t remember what they were.
DID YOU KNOW Your incoming mail server is
?
also called your POP, IMAP, or Outlook Mail
(EAS) server; your outgoing mail server is also
called your SMTP server.
Creating and sending messages
1
2
From the Inbox, select New.
12 Do one of the following:
Begin entering one of the following for
the addressee:
Finish setup: Select Done to finish the
setup and go to the Inbox of the
account you set up, where you can
begin getting and sending email.
• Email address
• First name
• Last name
Test settings (POP and EAS accounts
only): Select Test Settings to test
settings for this account.
TIP If you enter address info that matches one
or more of your contacts, VersaMail displays
the matching contacts. To accept a
suggestion, select the correct contact. To
send to a different address, keep entering the
email address or name.
Set additional mail options: If your
system administrator or ISP provided
port numbers or security settings,
select Advanced, and then enter those
settings.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
96
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
3
4
Enter the subject and message text.
DID YOU KNOW
?
VersaMail makes up to five
attempts to send a message; if it is still not
successful, an alert message appears and you
must try to manually send the message again.
TIP To move between fields, press Up or
Down on the 5-way.
Select one of the following:
Adding attachments to your messages
Send: Connects and sends all
You can attach several types of files to your
email messages.
messages immediately. If the message
cannot be sent for any reason, the
message is stored in your Outbox.
.
TIP To remove an attachment, select the file in
the Attachments box, and then select
Delete.
Outbox: Puts the message in the
Outbox to send later.
Drafts: Saves the message so you can
continue working on it at another time.
Attaching photos and videos
1
Create the message to which you want
to attach the photo or video.
2
On the New Message screen, select
the red paper clip
icon in the
upper-right corner.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
97
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
3
From the Type pick list, select Photo/
3
From the Type pick list, select Sounds.
Video.
TIP Ringtones that are copy-protected appear
in the Sounds application with a lock icon. You
can use these ringtones on your phone, but
you cannot send them as attachments.
4
5
Select the ringtone you want, and then
select Insert.
Select Done.
Attaching Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and
PDF files
4
On the Select Media screen, select the
Album pick list to go to the album
containing the photo or video you want,
and then check the box to the left of the
photo or video.
1
Create the message to which you want
to attach the file.
2
On the New Message screen, select
the red paper clip
upper-right corner.
icon in the
5
Select Done.
.
TIP To attach more than one file to a message,
repeat steps 3 and 4.
3
4
5
From the Type pick list, select
Documents.
Select the file you want on the
Documents screen.
Attaching ringtones
1
Create the message to which you want
to attach the ringtone.
Select Done.
2
On the New Message screen, select
the red paper clip
icon in the
upper-right corner.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
98
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
Attaching other types of files
1
Create the message to which you want
to attach the item.
2
On the New Message screen, select
the red paper clip
icon in the
upper-right corner.
3
From the Type pick list, select the type
of file to attach—for example, Address,
Appointment, or Memo/Text.
4
5
Select the item you want from the list in
the Type box.
Select Done.
Receiving and viewing messages
1
From any mailbox, select Get or Get &
Send.
2
From the Inbox, select the message you
want to view.
3
4
If a large incoming message is
truncated, select More
.
TIP A circular arrow in the lower-right corner of
the Inbox revolves to indicate background
activity, such as downloading messages.
TIP When viewing a message, tap the scroll
arrows at the top of the screen to view the
previous or next message.
Select Done.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
99
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
Replying to or forwarding messages
1
From any folder, open the message with
the attachment you want to view.
Messages with downloaded
attachments appear with a paper clip
icon to the left of the message icon.
When you respond to messages, you can
select whether to include the original text
DID YOU KNOW The VersaMail application
?
TIP If an attachment is not downloaded
because it is larger than your maximum
message size, the paper clip icon does not
appear, and the attachment is not displayed at
the bottom of the message screen. Select
More to download and display any
sends all messages as plain text only, with all
HTML tags stripped, even if you are
forwarding or replying to a message that was
originally received as HTML.
1
2
From the Inbox or another folder, open
the message you want to respond to.
attachments. However, if the attachment is
larger than the limit set by IT or by the email
provider, the attachment is not downloaded.
In Message View, select Reply. Select
whether to reply to just the sender or to
reply to both the sender and all
2
Select the attachment name at the
bottom of the message screen to view
it in the default viewer on your Centro.
addressees on the message.
3
4
Enter your reply.
Select Send.
TIP You can also select the folder icon to the
left of the attachment name to open a menu
of tasks you can do with the attachment,
including View, Install, or Unzip, depending on
the attachment file type; Save to card to save
the attachment to an expansion card; or select
Viewer to select the application you want to
use to view the attachment.
Viewing attachments
There are a number of attachment types
you can open with the built-in software
on your Centro (for example, Microsoft
Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and PDF files;
ringtones; and photos).
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
100
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
3
When you finish with the attachment,
select Done to return to the
Attachments dialog box.
•
To quickly switch between folders in list
view, select the folder pick list at the
top of the screen and select the desired
folder.
NOTE If there is no Done button, press
Applications and select Email to
return to the account’s Inbox.
Deleting selected messages from the
Inbox
When you delete a message from the
Inbox, it moves to the Trash folder.
Managing your messages
The status icons that appear near the
messages in your Inbox indicate the
following:
1
Select the bullet next to the icon of each
message that you want to delete. To
select adjacent messages, drag the
stylus so that it touches the bullet to the
left of each message. Lift the stylus and
drag again to select more adjacent
messages.
The message is unread when the
subject appears in bold.
The message includes an
attachment.
2
3
4
Press Menu
.
The message includes a meeting
invitation.
Select Delete on the Message menu.
This message has high priority.
If a confirmation dialog box appears,
select OK to confirm the deletion.
You can rearrange the message list to
make it easier to find and view messages.
TIP To delete a single message, select the
envelope icon next to the message, and then
select Delete from the list.
•
In the Inbox, select Sort, and then
select one of the following: By Subject,
By Sender, By Size, or By Date.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
101
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
Deleting messages by date
DID YOU KNOW
?
If you assigned VersaMail to a
You can quickly delete a group of
messages by selecting a range of dates.
quick button, you can press that button
repeatedly to switch between your email
accounts.
1
2
Press Menu
.
Select Delete Old on the Message
Customizing your email settings
menu.
You can customize the VersaMail settings
for each individual email account on your
Centro. The preferences you set apply only
to the email account you are currently
viewing. If you have multiple accounts,
configure each account separately.
3
Select the folder and a date range for
the messages you want to delete.
4
5
Select OK.
If a confirmation dialog box appears,
select OK to confirm the deletion.
You can set up a schedule to automatically
retrieve email messages; set preferences
for how and when messages are retrieved;
add a signature to an outgoing message;
and more. For complete information on all
the email settings you can customize, see
the User Guide for the VersaMail
TIP To empty (or purge) the Trash folder, open
the Message menu and select Empty Trash.
Switching accounts
If you create more than one email account
in VersaMail, you need to switch from
account to account to get, send, and
otherwise manage the messages in each
account.
Application on the Getting Started CD.
Scheduling Auto Sync
1
2
Press Menu
.
You can set up VersaMail to automatically
download new email messages to your
Centro with the Auto Sync feature.
Select Accounts, and then select an
account.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
102
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
6
Select the Start Time and End Time
boxes, and then select the hour, the
minute, and AM or PM to enter the time
for the first and last Auto Sync to take
place. Select OK.
TIP You need to set up a separate Auto Sync
schedule for each email account. This feature
may not work with email accounts that require
VPN connection.
7
8
Select the days you want the schedule
to be active. You can choose any
number of days, but you can set up only
one schedule for each email account.
1
2
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
3
Select Auto Sync.
Select OK, and then select Get Mail.
TIP After you set up a scheduled Auto Sync
and select Get Mail, only new messages are
retrieved during Auto Sync.
Viewing the Activity Log
The Activity Log lists ongoing and
completed background transactions, such
as downloading email, between the server
and your email account.
4
5
Check the Auto-sync box.
Select the Every pick list and select the
time interval, from 5 minutes to
12 hours.
1
2
From the Inbox, press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select View
Activity Log.
NOTE If you set a more frequent interval,
you may need to recharge your Centro
battery more often.
3
Select a listed action.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
103
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
4
Do either of the following:
Setting preferences for getting messages
• To cancel an ongoing action, select
Stop. If the action has already been
completed, Stop does not appear.
1
2
3
From any mailbox screen, press
Menu
.
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
• To view the details of a completed
action, select Details.
Select Incoming.
5
Select Done.
Selecting alert tones
When you schedule Auto Sync for a given
account, you can choose a sound—such as
a bird, a phone, or an alarm—to let you
know when new email arrives.
1
From any mailbox screen, press
Menu
.
4
Set any of the following preferences,
and then select OK.
2
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
Get: Indicates whether to get message
subjects only or entire messages.
3
4
Select Alerts.
Check the Alert me of new mail box.
Ask Every Time: Indicates if you want
to see a dialog box for selecting
subjects only or entire messages each
time you retrieve email. If the box is
unchecked, messages are retrieved
according to the option you select in the
Get pick list.
5
Select the Alert Sound pick list, and
then select a sound. Your Centro plays a
brief demo of the sound.
6
Select OK.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
104
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
Unread messages (IMAP accounts
only): Downloads only unread mail to
your Centro. If you don’t check this box
and you select Get & Send, all the
messages on your mail server are
downloaded to your Inbox, including
messages you’ve read.
including attachments. The maximum
message size that you can retrieve is
60KB for the body text and
approximately 5MB of total data for any
attachments.
Message Format: Sets the format for
messages you retrieve.
• HTML: Displays messages sent in
HTML format with basic formatting
intact and displays other messages as
plain text.
TIP The POP protocol does not support
retrieval of unread mail only from the server. If
you have a POP email account, VersaMail
downloads all messages regardless of
whether you have read them, and regardless
of whether the Unread messages box is
checked.
• Text: Displays all messages as plain
text, regardless of the format in which
they were sent.
Mail from last: Gets messages sent
within the number of days you specify.
Attaching a signature to a message
You can attach a personal signature, with
info such as your company’s address and
phone numbers, to the bottom of all
messages you send.
Download attachments: Automatically
downloads files attached to email,
except for attachments that exceed the
maximum message size.
1
From any mailbox screen, press
Menu
Maximum message size: Sets the
maximum size of an incoming email
message. Enter the size in kilobytes
(KB). The default is 5KB, but you can
enter any size up to 2,048KB
.
2
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
(approximately 2 megabytes [MB]),
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
105
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
3
4
5
Select Signature.
continues to synchronize with your desktop
software.
Check the Attach Signature box.
Enter your signature information, and
then select OK.
The Exchange server pushes email
messages, Calendar events, meeting
invitations, and updated contact
information it receives onto your Centro.
Likewise, when you create an email
message or event or you update a contact
on your Centro, it can be pushed to the
server.
Working with Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync®
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® works
with the VersaMail, Calendar, and Contacts
apps on your Centro to directly access
corporate groupware information on a
Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 or
Exchange Server 2003. You can
synchronize business email, calendar, and
contact info with the Exchange 2003
server from your Centro without using a
desktop computer.
DID YOU KNOW
?
Your Centro turns on and an
alert appears whenever you receive a new
message. To save battery life, you can turn
alerts off for your Exchange ActiveSync
account. Go to the account, press Menu,
select Options, and then select Preferences.
Select Alerts, and then uncheck the alert box.
When you create a Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync account in the VersaMail
application, your email, calendar, and
contact info sync directly with the
Exchange server; information does not
sync with the desktop software application
on your computer, such as Microsoft
Outlook or Palm Desktop software. Other
information that is stored on your
Pushing email, events, and contacts
The Exchange server pushes email
messages, Calendar events, meeting
invitations, and updated contact
information it receives onto your Centro.
NOTE Find out from your system
administrator if your Exchange server
supports push and has push turned on.
computer, such as tasks and memos,
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
106
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
Likewise, when you create an email
message or event or you update a contact
on your Centro, it can be pushed to the
server.
TIP When push is enabled, certain
preferences change for your Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync account only. A new
Auto Sync preference is created, including
Auto Sync and Alerts options. The Advanced
preferences, including Connection and Server
options, are removed.
KEY TERM Push Technology in which a server
automatically delivers new information (such
as new email messages) to a device. The user
does not need to do anything.
Turning off push
When push is enabled, you can turn it off—
for example, to save battery life.
Push from server to Centro happens
automatically as new or changed items
arrive on the server. When you create a
new message, appointment, or contact on
your Centro, the new item is pushed from
your Centro to the server at the following
times:
1
Open VersaMail and go to your
Exchange ActiveSync account (this is
typically your corporate email account).
2
3
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
•
When a server-to-Centro push takes
place
4
Select Auto Sync, and then do one of
the following:
•
When you select Sync in your Exchange
ActiveSync account to manually retrieve
information
• To switch from push to an Auto Sync
schedule for email, calendar, or
contacts, select the When pick list
and then select any schedule option
except As Items Arrive.
•
At a preset time interval, if neither of
the preceding two events takes place
during that interval—for example, if
neither a server push nor a manual sync
takes place for ten minutes
• To turn off push and manually retrieve
information, uncheck the box next to
the type of information you want to
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N
107
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
get manually (Mail, Calendar, or
Contacts).
For complete info on using a Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync account, see the
User Guide for the VersaMail Application
on the Getting Started CD.
Using Remote Address Lookup
Remote Address Lookup enables you to
retrieve email addresses on your corporate
Exchange server.
Xpress Mail
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Be sure your phone
is on and you are within a coverage area.
Xpress Mail works with your existing
corporate and personal email accounts to
transfer messages to your Centro. You can
add up to three different email accounts in
Xpress Mail to access on your Centro.
1
Open VersaMail and go to your
Exchange ActiveSync account.
2
3
Select New.
On the new message screen, begin
addressing the message. If the name
you want does not appear on the Smart
Setting up Xpress Mail to work with a
personal email account
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your
phone is on and that you are in an area
where a data connection is available. You
can tell a data connection is available when
Addressing list, press Menu
select Options, and then select
Remote Lookup.
,
4
5
6
Enter text that you want to find on the
server. For example, type “Ste” to
search for a person named Steve.
either a black triangle
or green arrows
appear in the signal-strength icon in
the title bar of the Main tab of the Phone
application.
Select Search. Any names or addresses
on the server that match the characters
you entered are displayed.
When the name you want appears,
select it, and then select Add.
X P R E S S M A I L
108
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
1
2
3
4
Press Applications
select XpressMail
, and then
11 To begin service with your provider,
select Register.
.
Select Install Now. If prompted, select 12 When the AT&T Xpress Mail home
Yes to connect to the Internet.
screen appears, select your email
account to go to its Inbox.
Select Download Now, and then select
Yes to begin downloading.
Setting up Xpress Mail to work with a
corporate email account
Select Save, and then select Yes to
accept the application.
Xpress Mail is a self-service option for
accessing your corporate email from your
Centro without support from IT. Using
Xpress Mail with a corporate account also
enables wireless synchronization of
calendar appointments and contacts, as
well as wireless corporate directory
lookup.
5
6
Select Reset.
Press Applications
select XpressMail
, and then
.
7
8
9
Select OK to accept the license
agreement.
Confirm your ten-digit mobile phone
number and press Next.
Select your email provider name, and
then press Next. If your email provider
is not listed, select More to view
additional provider names.
DID YOU KNOW
?
The Xpress Mail software you
use to access your corporate email is called
the Professional Edition.
NOTE If you select More and your email
provider still does not appear on the list, go
To use Xpress Mail with your corporate
email account, you must install Xpress Mail
both on your computer and on your Centro.
10 Enter the username and password you
use to access your email account, and
then press Next.
X P R E S S M A I L
109
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
Setting up Xpress Mail on your computer NOTE Jot down your Xpress Mail
username and password exactly as you
enter them. You need this information later
in the Xpress Mail setup process.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN You need the
following:
•
•
Your work email address
4
5
Click Next.
The type of mail server your company
uses: Microsoft Exchange, Lotus Notes,
or IMAP
Click Download to copy Xpress Mail
desktop software to your computer.
6
7
8
When the File Download dialog box
appears, click Open.
•
The computer you use to access your
corporate email (Internet connection
required)
Click Yes to install Xpress Mail
Professional Edition.
1
2
3
On your computer, open your web
browser.
Follow the onscreen instructions to
finish the installation. On the
Completing the Xpress Mail
Professional Edition Setup Wizard
screen, uncheck Show Readme, and
make sure Run Xpress Mail
Professional Edition is checked. Click
Finish.
and click Register Now.
Enter all the required info, keeping the
following in mind:
• In the Email Address field, enter the
work email address you want to use
with Xpress Mail.
9
Enter the Xpress Mail username and
password you made up in step 3, and
then click Next.
• Your Xpress Mail username and
password can be anything you want;
they don’t need to match your email
username and password.
10 Select your company’s mail server from
the list, and then click Next.
11 If you want to access files on your
computer from your Centro, check the
X P R E S S M A I L
110
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
Enable access to documents box, and
then click Finish.
8
9
Confirm your ten-digit mobile phone
number and press Next.
Xpress Mail is now installed on your
computer. To access corporate mail on your
Centro using your Xpress Mail account, you
now need to install Xpress Mail on your
Centro.
If prompted, select Yes to connect to
the Internet.
10 Select Work, and then press Next.
11 Select Professional Edition, and then
press Next.
12 Select Register Device, and then press
Setting up Xpress Mail on your Centro
Next.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your
phone is on and that you are in an area
where a data connection is available.
13 Enter the username and password you
selected when you created your Xpress
Mail account on your computer, and
then press Next.
1
2
3
4
Press Applications
select Xpress Mail
, and then
.
14 Press Register.
Select Install Now. If prompted, select 15 When the registration process has
Yes to connect to the Internet. finished, press OK.
Select Download Now, and then select 16 When the Account Information screen
Yes to begin downloading.
appears, press Xpress Mail to go to the
Inbox of your account.
Select Save, and then select Yes to
accept the application.
Creating and sending email in Xpress Mail
5
6
Select Reset.
NOTE Before you can access your
corporate email, the Xpress Mail desktop
must be installed and running and your
computer must be connected to your mail
server.
Press Applications
select Xpress Mail
, and then
.
7
Select OK to accept the license
agreement.
X P R E S S M A I L
111
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
1
2
From the Inbox, select New
.
Messaging
Enter the addressee’s email address, a
subject, and your message. Separate
recipients’ names with commas (for
example,
janesmith4028@example1.com,
joesmith9056@example2.com).
When your phone is on, icons appear in the
title bar in the Main tab in the Phone
application to indicate whether data
services are available and whether a data
connection is active. Make sure that either
of the following icons appears in the title
3
Select Send Now to send the email
right away. Select Send to send it later.
(Send is useful if you’re not currently
connected to the Internet.)
bar of the Main tab:
. If you do not
see either of these icons, data services are
not available in your current location and
you cannot exchange multimedia
messages.
TIP If you have trouble sending messages, you
need to enter AT&T’s outgoing mail server
name. Open the Messaging tab in the Xpress
Mail desktop and click Server Setting. In the
Outgoing mail SMTP server field, enter
cwmx.com, and then click OK.
You can use the Messaging application to
exchange brief text messages (SMS) and
multimedia messages (MMS) with other
devices and email addresses that support
these forms of messaging. Before you use
your Centro to send or receive messages,
refer to your service plan for pricing and
availability of messaging services.
For additional detailed instructions on
setting up and using Xpress Mail, visit
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can address messages to
multiple recipients by separating the
addresses with a comma. If you address a
single message to three people, you will be
billed for three messages.
M E S S A G I N G
112
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
Creating and sending a text message
• If the recipient’s name isn’t in the list
of recent addresses or your Contacts
list, enter the phone number or email
address.
Each text message can have up to
160 characters. Messages with more than
160 characters are automatically split into
several messages. (If you send a text
message to an email address, the email
address is deducted from the
TIP If you see numbers when you expect to
see letters (or the other way around), you
need to turn Option Lock on by pressing
Option twice or turn it off by pressing Option
once.
160-character count.)
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can page someone to call
TIP Do you need to enter a short code that
contains letters? Use the keyboard to enter it;
just press the letter keys. For example, if the
code is “win01,” press W to enter w, I to enter
i, and so on. No need to figure out the
you by sending them a blank text message.
1
Press Applications
Messaging
and select
.
numbers that correspond to the letters
2
3
Select New.
Select the To field to address the
message:
NOTE Sending text messages to land-line
phones may not be supported.
• Press Center
. If the recipient’s
name appears in the list of recent
addresses, select it from the list.
4
Enter your message or select
QuickText
to insert predefined
phrases. To insert emoticons, select
.
• If the recipient is in your Contacts list,
enter the first initial and last name (no
spaces), and then select the
recipient’s phone number or email
address, depending on where you
want to send the message.
TIP To add a new QuickText phrase, select
Edit QuickText from the list.
M E S S A G I N G
113
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
NOTE Some symbols can’t be used in text Creating and sending a multimedia
messages. The Messaging application
automatically replaces invalid characters.
message
KEY TERM Slide A collection of text, pictures,
videos, and sounds that are grouped together
within a multimedia message. During
playback, all the items within a particular slide
appear on the same screen. If a multimedia
message contains multiple slides, each slide
can be viewed separately during playback.
Multimedia messages consist of text,
photos, videos, and sounds presented as
one or more slides. You can include any of
the following items:
5
Select Send.
0
TIP Select Save as Draft to save a draft of the
message without sending it. To access the
draft, select the category pick list at the top of
the screen and select Drafts.
Item
Supported File Types
JPG, GIF, WBMP
Pictures
Videos
MPEG4, 3GPP, 3GPP2
MIDI, AAC, AAC+, MP3
AMR, QCELP, MP3
Ringtones
Sound clips
1
Press Applications
and select
Messaging
.
2
3
Select New.
Select Add Media.
M E S S A G I N G
114
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
4
Select the To field to address the
message with up to 25 addresses:
• Press Center
. If the recipient’s
name appears in the list of recent
addresses, select it from the list.
• If the recipient is in your Contacts list,
enter the first initial and last name (no
spaces), and then select the
recipient’s phone number or email
address.
TIP When creating a message, you can
• If the recipient’s name is not in the list
of recent addresses or your Contacts
list, enter the phone number or email
address.
preview or delete an item. Highlight the item,
press Center on the 5-way, and then select
Remove, View, or Play.
7
(Optional) Select Sound , and then
select one of the following:
5
6
Enter a subject.
Select the image placeholder, and then
select one of the following:
Record new: Record a sound clip of up
to 1 minute.
Attach picture/video: Insert one photo
or video from your Centro or an
expansion card.
Attach voice memo: Select a memo
you recorded in the Voice Memo
application.
Take new picture: Take a picture with
the built-in camera and add it to the
message.
Attach ringtone: Select a ringtone.
8
9
Enter a text message or caption.
Take new video: Capture a short video
with the built-in camcorder and add it to
the message.
Select Add slide to insert additional
slides.
M E S S A G I N G
115
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
10 (Optional) Select Preview to view the
The new message alert may include any of
the following buttons:
message as the recipient will see it.
11 (Optional) Press Menu
, and then
OK: Dismisses the alert and places the
message in your Inbox.
select High Priority from the Compose
menu to mark the message as urgent.
Reply: Opens Chat View, where you can
reply with a text message. To send an
MMS reply, select Add from Chat View.
12 Select Send.
DID YOU KNOW You can send a contact or
?
calendar entry. Select the entry, open the
Record menu, select Send, and then select
Messaging.
Call Back: Dials the sender’s phone
number.
Go To Msg: Opens the message so you
can view its full contents.
Receiving messages
Delete: Moves the message from your
Inbox to the Deleted folder.
When your phone is turned on and is in an
area of wireless coverage, you
automatically receive new text messages.
For multimedia messages, you can set
your Centro to automatically download
new messages or to notify you that a
message is ready to be downloaded (see
can also configure how your Centro notifies
you when a new message arrives (see
M E S S A G I N G
116
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
Viewing/playing a multimedia message
TIP When you receive a message, you can
also press Send to call the sender.
1
Press Applications
Messaging
and select
.
TIP If you have multiple alerts, the Alert dialog
box displays all your pending alerts. Select an
item’s description to jump to that item, or
check the box to clear that item. To view all
your pending alerts from any screen on your
Centro, press and hold Center on the 5-way.
2
3
Select the message you want to view.
If there are sounds or multiple slides,
playback begins immediately.
4
Do any of the following:
• Use the onscreen controls to scroll to
other slides and messages.
Using links in messages
When you receive a text message that
contains a telephone number, email
address, or URL, you can dial the number,
send an email message, or go to the web
page immediately.
1
2
3
Press Applications
Messaging
and select
.
Select the message that contains the
link you want to use.
• To save a sound, press Menu
and select Save Sound from the
Message menu. You can access
saved sounds later by pressing
,
Select the phone number, email
address, or URL (appears as underlined
blue text).
Applications
Sounds
and selecting
or Voice Memo
Your Centro automatically launches the
appropriate application from the link.
.
M E S S A G I N G
117
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
• To save a picture, press Menu
and select Save Picture from the
Message menu. You can access
saved pictures later by pressing
,
1
2
Press Applications
Messaging
and select
.
Select the folder list in the title bar and
select the folder you want to sort.
Applications
Pics&Videos
and selecting
3
4
Press Menu
.
.
Select View, and then select Sort by
Name or Sort by Date.
• To copy the text, use the stylus to
highlight the text, press Menu
,
select Edit, and then select Copy.
• To stop playback of a message, select
Play/Stop.
• To view message details, press
Menu
and select Message
Details from the Message menu.
• To save a calendar or contact entry,
open the message details. You can
access saved entries later by pressing
Applications
Calendar
(depending on the type of entry you
saved).
and selecting
or Contacts
Deleting messages
You can delete several messages at once
from any folder by using the Purge
command.
5
Select OK.
TIP To delete an individual message, highlight
it in the message list, and then select Delete.
Arranging your messages
You can rearrange the messages in any
folder by using the Sort command.
M E S S A G I N G
118
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
1
2
Press Applications
Messaging
and select
You can carry on multiple chats at the same
time and easily switch between them,
using the pick list at the top of the screen.
.
Select the folder list in the title bar and
select the folder that contains the
messages you want to delete.
TIP To find a chat you had with someone, open
your Messaging Inbox and select a chat
session.
3
4
5
Press Menu
.
Select Purge from the Message menu.
Select the Purge pick list, and then
select an option.
1
2
Press Applications
Messaging
Do one of the following:
and select
.
6
Select OK.
Start a new chat: Select a message
and reply to it.
Chatting with Messaging
DID YOU KNOW You can send and receive text
?
Continue an existing chat: Select a
message that displays the Chat
icon.
messages even while you are on a phone call.
This is easiest when using a hands-free device
or the speakerphone.
When you exchange more than one
message with a single contact, the
messages you exchange with that person
are grouped into a chat session. When you
select a chat session from your message
list, the upper part of Chat View displays all
messages you’ve exchanged with this
contact, and the lower part provides an
entry area.
3
Enter your message.
M E S S A G I N G
119
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
MMS Receipts: Indicates whether you
want to receive a confirmation when an
outgoing MMS message is delivered.
TIP Pale gray text indicates that a message is
pending or enroute.
Validity Period: Indicates how long you
want an outgoing message to be valid.
4
Select Send.
Customizing your Messaging settings
Confirm message deletions: Indicates
whether you want deletion confirmation
prompts to appear.
1
Press Applications
and select
Messaging
.
2
3
Press Menu
.
Privacy Mode (hide text): Indicates
whether you want the body text to
appear in the alert when you receive a
new message, or whether you want the
alert to hide the text and prompt you to
go to the message.
From the Options menu, select
Preferences.
4
On the Messages tab, set any of the
following preferences for your individual
messages:
5
Select the Chat tab and set any of the
following preferences for chat sessions:
New message: Indicates whether text
or multimedia messaging is the default
format for a new message.
M E S S A G I N G
120
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
Create chats from messages: Indicate
when you want to group messages
from the same person into a chat.
Show timestamps in chats: Indicate
whether you want to see the local date
and time the message was sent next to
each message.
Display my name in chat window as:
Enter the name you want to use as the
label for your messages in Chat View.
Automatically collect MMS
messages: Indicate whether you want
to download multimedia messages
automatically.
Label color: Select a color to
differentiate your messages from the
sender’s messages while in Chat View.
Network Configuration: Indicate if you
want to use Automatic or Manual
message retrieval. If you select Manual,
select Edit and enter the AT&T settings.
Use color for: Indicate whether you
want both your name and message text
in the selected label color, or only your
name.
NOTE We recommend that you do not
change the Network Configuration
settings.
6
Select the Network tab and set any of
the following preferences for network
connections.
7
Select OK.
Selecting Messaging alert tones
DID YOU KNOW
?
Your Centro includes a silent
alert that can vibrate even when the Ringer
switch is set to Sound Off.
M E S S A G I N G
121
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
1
Press Applications
and select
What are all those icons?
Messaging.
TIP By default, the Messaging app shows the
Inbox folder. To view a different folder, select
the folder list in the title bar and select a
different folder from the list.
2
3
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Alerts.
The message descriptions in the Inbox,
Outbox, and Sent folders show the
message status:
•
•
•
Unread messages appear in bold.
Read messages appear in plain text.
Urgent messages appear with a red
exclamation point (!).
4
5
6
7
Select the Application pick list and
select Messaging.
The following icons show the message
type and additional status info:
Select the Volume pick list and select
the volume level.
A text message
A chat session
Select the Vibrate pick list and select
when you want your Centro to vibrate.
Select the Message Tone pick list and
select a tone for incoming message
alerts.
A multimedia message that is ready
for you to download
8
9
Check the boxes if you want to see
onscreen alerts when a new message
arrives and when a message you sent is
received.
A multimedia message that is fully
downloaded
A multimedia message that is fully
downloaded and contains sound
Select Done.
M E S S A G I N G
122
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
Instant Messaging on your Centro is similar
to Instant Messaging on your computer.
Using the IM application, you can sign on
to up to three IM communities, send and
receive instant messages, and view
contact status information and manage
your presence. You can switch among IM
communities with a touch of the 5-way.
A message that is waiting to be
sent
A receipt, which you requested,
confirming delivery of the message
An outgoing message with an error
DID YOU KNOW If you are outside a coverage
?
Messages are billed to the owner of the
Centro no matter which IM account you
use.
area or if your phone is turned off, outgoing
messages go into the Outbox. When you
return to a coverage area or turn your phone
on, your pending messages are automatically
sent and transferred to the Sent folder.
Accessing IM
1
Press Applications
and select
Instant Messaging
.
Instant Messaging
(IM)
2
Select an IM community.
Instant Messaging (IM) is a form of
real-time communication between two
people based on the exchange of short,
simple text messages via computer or
mobile device. You can see which of your
contacts are available to participate in an
IM conversation or chat. You initiate a chat
by selecting an available contact and
sending a message.
I N S T A N T M E S S A G I N G ( I M )
123
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
Signing on
Once you sign on, you can add contacts to
establish a list of people you want to
correspond with via Instant Messaging.
You can also indicate whether or not you
are available for Instant Messaging.
1
If you are signing on to your existing IM
account on your Centro, sign on to the
community using your existing
username or email address (whichever
your IM provider requires) and
password.
Sending a Message
You can select Quick Text and Smileys to
make your messages quick and easy to
enter or you can simply enter text in the
usual way.
NOTE Some IM providers allow you to
sign on to multiple devices at the same
time, for example, both your Centro and
your computer. With other IM providers,
signing on to an existing IM account on
your Centro may automatically sign you out
of another currently running IM session.
1
2
Sign on to an IM community.
Select Send Message To and select a
recipient from your contacts list.
3
Enter the text of your message and
select Send.
1
Press Applications
Instant Messaging
and select
.
2
3
Select an IM community.
Receiving a Message
Enter your username and password in
the form requested by the IM
community.
You can receive messages as long as you
are signed on to an IM community. A beep
announces the arrival of an IM message.
4
5
(Optional) Select Save Password to
have your password stored in IM.
1
When you hear a beep, press
Applications
Messaging
and select Instant
(Optional) Select Auto Sign On to
automatically sign on to the IM
community whenever you select it.
.
6
Select Done or Sign On.
I N S T A N T M E S S A G I N G ( I M )
124
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
2
Select an IM community you are signed
on to. If you don’t see your message,
•
•
When you select Exit, you can go to
other applications and return without
signing in again. Conversations remain
active.
use the five-way
to switch among
IM communities until your message is
visible.
When you select Sign Out, you are
asked to confirm that you want to
terminate the session and end all active
conversations. When you confirm, you
officially sign out, and your contacts see
you as unavailable. To resume instant
messaging, you must sign in again to
the IM provider.
Leaving IM
You can either exit an IM community or
sign out.
I N S T A N T M E S S A G I N G ( I M )
125
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S
5
I N S T A N T M E S S A G I N G ( I M )
126
CHAPTER
6
Your Push to Talk application
Push to Talk from AT&T is a convenient way to stay in touch
with friends, family, and colleagues. With this walkie-talkie type
of service, you can see who is available to talk and you can
instantly reach others without dialing phone numbers and
waiting for the phone to ring. Push to Talk calls can be made to
one person or to a group of people. Think of Push to Talk as
instant messaging that uses voice instead of text.
Benefits
•
Organize your friends and
colleagues into groups
•
Select the PTT contacts who are
out with you on a Saturday night;
coordinate a rendezvous point with
one PTT call
•
Communicate with a large,
dispersed group of people by voice
or text message
127
In this chapter
Setting up PTT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Viewing availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N
6
one time or up to 29 in a group); an icon
next to each name tells you whether
they're available. Then press and hold the
Side button to make the call.
What is Push to Talk?
Have you ever had to use the phone to
coordinate the actions of, or give
information to, a group of people? With
Push to Talk (PTT) you can instantly inform
all of them with a single call.
Since the speakerphone is automatically
on, hold your Centro like a walkie-talkie, a
few inches away from your mouth, and
listen for the tone that signals that you can
start to speak.
How PTT works
To make a PTT call, press the Side button
to go to Push to Talk. Select the people you
want to talk to (up to seven individuals at
W H A T I S P U S H T O T A L K ?
129
Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N
6
each decide to head off in a separate
direction for the day. When you’re ready
to set a meeting place, you can call the
whole family at once. No more putting
one person on hold and switching lines
or calling people multiple times to
arrange the gathering.
DID YOU KNOW The speakerphone is
automatically on when you are available,
unless your Ringer switch is set to Sound Off
?
Like a walkie-talkie, PTT allows only one
person to speak at a time. No one else can
speak until you give up control by releasing
the Side button. A tone signals that you
gave up control. Now somebody else on
the call can have a turn speaking.
DID YOU KNOW
?
With a single fee per month,
PTT may be more economical than sending
text messages to a group of people or making
conference calls.
What can I do with PTT?
Sign up for PTT service
Here are a couple of examples of what you
can do with PTT:
To use PTT you must first subscribe to the
AT&T Push to Talk service and then set up
the Push to Talk application on your
Palm® Centro™ smart device. Next, create a
PTT list by inviting people to be your PTT
contacts.
•
Your work colleagues are scattered in
several buildings on campus and around
the country. You created a Project Team
group in PTT. An important last-minute
change happens in the project; for
things to go smoothly, you need to
communicate the news right away.
Using Push to Talk, you can instantly
speak to the entire team; everyone
hears the same thing, and everyone
knows what everyone else needs to do.
Your PTT contact list is separate from your
contact list in the Contacts application, and
the people you invite must also subscribe
to the AT&T Push to Talk service. So to get
the full benefit of Push to Talk, you may
want to encourage a bunch of your friends,
family members, or business colleagues to
•
You’re on vacation with your family and
you create a Family Vacation group. You
W H A T I S P U S H T O T A L K ?
130
Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N
6
also subscribe to the AT&T Push to Talk
service.
1
2
Press the Side button to go to PTT.
Select the availability pick list in the
upper-right corner, and then select the
icon that describes your availability.
Setting up PTT
Here are the icons:
Available: Your Ringer switch is set
to Sound On , and you
automatically hear incoming PTT
calls.
Setting up the Push to Talk application
1
2
3
4
Press Applications
.
Select Push to Talk
.
Select Yes to set up Push to Talk.
Silent: Your Ringer switch is set to
Sound Off
. When a PTT call
Enter the name you want people to see,
comes in, you get an alert. You can
choose whether to answer or ignore
the PTT call.
and then select OK.
Do Not Disturb: You can make PTT
calls, but you cannot receive them.
Log Out: You cannot make or
receive PTT calls.
5
Wait for the Welcome to Push to Talk
screen to appear. If an error appears
instead, contact AT&T for assistance.
NOTE The Available option appears in the
availability pick list only when the Ringer
Setting your availability
switch is set to Sound On
. Similarly,
the Silent option appears in the availability
pick list only when the Ringer switch is set
When you first set up Push to Talk, your
availability is automatically set to Available.
You can change your availability setting at
any time.
to Sound Off
.
S E T T I N G U P P T T
131
Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N
6
Creating a PTT
contact list
Although your PTT contact list is separate
from your contact list in the Contacts
application, you can still include contacts
from the Contacts application as well as
names and numbers you enter on the spot.
You can also create groups to
When you change your availability status,
the availability icon in the upper-right corner
of the PTT screen shows your new
availability status in about ten seconds.
Similarly, after about ten seconds, the
AT&T network updates your availability
status on the PTT screen of all your
contacts and groups.
communicate with several people at the
same time.
TIP To add a contact to your PTT contact list or
to a PTT group, the contact must subscribe to
the AT&T Push to Talk service.
Adding a contact
TIP Anytime you want to check your availability
setting, just glance at the availability icon in
the upper-right corner of the PTT screen. You
can also see your availability icon in the
upper-right corner of the Phone application
title bar.
1
2
Press the Side button to go to PTT.
Select New, and then select New
Contact from the pop-up menu.
C R E A T I N G
A
P T T C O N T A C T L I S T
132
Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N
6
contact’s current availability status once
they accept the invitation.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can have up to 99 contacts
in your PTT contacts list.
Changing a contact’s name
3
4
Select Lookup.
When you change a contact’s name, the
change affects only the way that contact’s
name appears on your device.
Select the contact you want to add, and
then select Add.
5
(Optional) Select the name and change
it to the name that you want to see in
your PTT list—for example, a nickname.
You can use up to 20 characters for the
name.
1
2
3
Press the Side button to go to PTT.
Highlight the contact’s name.
Press Right
to open the pop-up
menu.
6
Select OK to send the contact an
invitation to join your PTT list.
4
Select View Contact.
TIP If a contact is not listed in your Contacts
application, you can add a contact by entering
the person’s name and mobile phone number.
Be sure to include the area code, but you
don’t need to enter hyphens or punctuation;
PTT enters those for you.
The contact’s name appears in your PTT
list, and the icon indicates that the
contact has not responded to the
5
6
Enter a new name for the contact.
Select OK.
invitation. This icon changes to reflect the
C R E A T I N G
A
P T T C O N T A C T L I S T
133
Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N
6
Deleting a contact
1
2
Press the Side button to go to PTT.
Highlight the contact you want to
delete.
3
Press Right
to open the pop-up
menu.
4
5
Select Delete.
Select Yes.
3
4
Enter a name for the group (up to 20
characters).
The contact receives a message indicating
that you deleted him or her from your PTT
list.
Check the box next to each contact you
want to add to the group, and uncheck
any contacts you do not want to include
in this group.
Creating a group
Groups are an easy way to make calls or to
send voice or text messages to multiple
PTT contacts at the same time. You can
create up to 30 groups. Each group can
include up to 29 contacts.
5
Select OK.
TIP Need to add a group member who is not
already a contact in your PTT list? After the
group is created, you can edit the group and
add new members and contacts.
1
2
Press the Side button to go to PTT.
Select New, and then select New
Group from the pop-up menu.
TIP You can also create a group by first
checking the boxes next to names in the main
PTT list and then selecting New.
The New Group dialog box shows you
all the contacts in your PTT list.
C R E A T I N G
A
P T T C O N T A C T L I S T
134
Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N
6
Responding to invitations
Defer: Places the invitation in your Pending
list so that you can respond later by
When you’re invited to join someone else’s
PTT list, you receive an invitation. You also
receive an invitation when a group owner
asks you to join a group.
selecting the Pending invitation
in the title bar or by responding to an
invitation reminder.
icon
TIP If you don’t respond within seven days, the
invitation expires and you must receive and
accept another invitation to join the PTT list or
group.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can set your PTT settings
to automatically accept all invitations. See
Customizing your PTT settings for details.
Editing a group
Select one of the following to respond to
an invitation:
1
2
3
Press the Side button to go to PTT.
Highlight the group you want to edit.
Accept: Sends an acceptance message to
the contact or group owner. The
requester’s name appears in your PTT list
and your name appears in the requester’s
PTT list or group.
Press Right
to open the pop-up
menu.
4
Select Edit Group.
Decline: Sends a message to the contact
or group owner indicating that you don’t
want to join the PTT list or group.
C R E A T I N G
A
P T T C O N T A C T L I S T
135
Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N
6
5
If you are the owner of the group, you
can do any of the following:
6
If you are not the owner of the group,
you can do any of the following:
• View the availability of each member.
• View the availability of each group
member.
• View a group member’s mobile phone
number by highlighting the member’s
name and waiting a few seconds for
the number to appear.
• Change the group name.
• Add a member by selecting New
Member and entering a name and
number or by checking the box next to
a contact’s name. The new person
receives your invitation, and all the
existing group members receive an
alert when the person accepts or
refuses the invitation.
• Change the group name. The other
members don’t see the new name.
• Invite a group member to join your
PTT list by highlighting the member’s
name, pressing Menu
, and then
selecting Invite Selected Member.
• Delete a member by unchecking the
box next to the member’s name. The
person receives a deletion notification
and all the remaining group members
receive an alert notifying them that
the contact is no longer in the group.
• Invite all group members to join your
PTT list by pressing Menu and
selecting Invite ALL Members.
• Leave the group by selecting Leave.
7
Press OK.
C R E A T I N G
A
P T T C O N T A C T L I S T
136
Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N
6
Leaving a group
The group members receive a message
indicating that you deleted the group.
If you are not the owner of a group, you
can leave a group at any time. If you’re the
group’s owner, you must delete the group
to leave it.
Viewing availability
1
2
3
Press the Side button to go to PTT.
It’s easy to know when your contacts are
available to talk. Simply glance at the
Availability icon next to each contact or
group name in your PTT list.
Highlight the group you want to leave.
Press Right
to open the pop-up
menu.
4
5
Select Leave.
Select Yes.
The group is removed from your PTT list
and the remaining group members receive
a message indicating that you left the
group.
Deleting a group
If you are the owner of a group, you can
dissolve a group by deleting it.
The Availability icons indicate the following:
1
2
3
Press the Side button to go to PTT.
The contact has not responded to
your PTT invitation.
Highlight the group you want to delete.
Press Right
to open the pop-up
The contact is available to receive PTT
calls.
menu.
4
5
Select Delete Group.
Select Yes.
V I E W I N G A V A I L A B I L I T Y
137
Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N
6
The contact’s Ringer switch is set to
Sound Off so that he or she can
screen PTT calls.
All group members have logged out,
are outside the coverage area, or have
turned off their phones. They cannot
make or receive PTT calls. This status
also appears when all group members
have low batteries.
The contact’s status is Do Not Disturb
(DND), which means the contact is
logged in to PTT but is refusing all PTT
calls.
The contact has logged out and
cannot make or receive PTT calls
because the contact turned off their
phone. This status also appears when
the contact’s battery is low.
TIP The numbers that appear next to the
group name, such as (4/5), indicate how many
group members are available to make and
receive PTT calls.
TIP A plus sign next to a name indicates a
group. Select it to see the members of the
group
One or more group members are
available to receive PTT calls.
One or more group members have
their Ringer switch set to Sound Off
so that they can screen PTT calls.
NOTE When someone changes their
availability setting, it takes about ten
seconds for the availability icon in the
picklist to change to the new availability
icon.
None of the invitees has responded to
the invitation to join the group.
All group members do not want to
receive PTT calls.
Receiving availability alerts
You can choose whether you receive an
alert when a contact becomes available.
1
2
Press the Side button to go to PTT.
Highlight the contact for whom you
want to set the alert status.
V I E W I N G A V A I L A B I L I T Y
138
Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N
6
3
4
Press Right
menu.
to open the pop-up
TIP You can simultaneously change the alert
status for multiple contacts. Check the box
next to the contacts for whom you want to
change the alert status, and highlight one of
the selected contacts. Press Right to open
the pop-up menu and select Set All Contact
Alerts to change the alert status for the
selected contacts.
Select Set Contact Alert to ON to
receive availability alerts. To turn off
availability alerts, select Set Contact
Alert to OFF.
TIP You can also view and revise the alert
status for all your contacts by pressing Menu,
selecting Options, and then selecting
Contact Alerts. To change the alert status,
check or uncheck the box next to a contact’s
name, and then select OK to accept your
changes.
When you receive an availability alert, you
can do any of the following:
Making calls
•
•
•
•
Press the Side button to make a PTT
call to the contact.
You can use Push to Talk to make PTT calls
to one or more of your PTT contacts, to a
group, or to selected group members. You
can also use Push to Talk to make a phone
(cellular) call to one of your PTT contacts.
Press Send to make a phone call to
the contact.
Select Ignore with Text to address a
text message to the contact.
NOTE You cannot call both a contact and a
group at the same time.
Select Dismiss to acknowledge the
alert without taking action.
M A K I N G C A L L S
139
Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N
6
Making a PTT call
When you release the Side button, a
tone signals the person(s) on the other
end that you’ve finished talking and the
next person can begin to speak.
1
2
Press the Side button to go to PTT.
Check the box next to up to seven
contacts or highlight the group you
want to call.
NOTE When you make a PTT call, the
speakerphone is on by default when the
Ringer switch is set to Sound On. If your
Ringer switch is set to Sound Off, the PTT
call goes to the earpiece.
TIP You can jump to a particular contact or
group by entering the first few letters of the
contact or group name.
When a tone signals you that the other
person has finished speaking, you can
press and hold the Side button again to
continue the conversation.
7
Press Power/End
to hang up.
DID YOU KNOW
?
If a PTT call remains inactive
for more than 30 seconds, the call ends
automatically.
3
Hold your Centro a few inches from
your mouth, as you would hold a
walkie-talkie.
KEY TERM Quick Group A selection of
multiple contacts that you make to form an ad
hoc group for a single call. The contacts in a
Quick Group must have a status of Available or
Silent. If a contact’s status is DND or Logged
Out, you cannot include that contact in a
Quick Group.
4
5
Press and hold the Side button.
Wait for the tone that signals when you
can begin to speak.
6
When you’ve finished speaking, release
the Side button.
M A K I N G C A L L S
140
Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N
6
Making a PTT call to a dynamic group
Making a phone call
From time to time you may want to talk to
selected members of a group instead of to
the whole group. You can do this by making
a dynamic group call.
1
2
3
Press the Side button to go to PTT.
Highlight the contact you want to call.
Press Send , and then select Dial to
make the call.
1
2
Press the Side button to go to PTT.
Highlight the group that contains the
contacts you want to call.
3
Press Right
to open the pop-up
menu.
4
Press Power/End
to hang up.
4
5
Select Dynamic Call.
Select group members by checking the
box next to their names.
Receiving calls
When your phone is on and your availability
is set to Available, you automatically hear
incoming PTT callers speaking.
When your phone is on and your availability
is set to Silent or if you receive a PTT call
while you’re on another call, you receive an
onscreen alert.
6
7
Press and hold the Side button to make
the call.
Press Power/End
to hang up.
R E C E I V I N G C A L L S
141
Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N
6
•
•
Select Dismiss or press the Volume
button to acknowledge the alert without
taking action.
Quickly press the Side button to
dismiss the Call-Me alert.
You can do either of the following:
•
Press Send or select Answer to
accept the call.
•
Press Power/End or select Ignore to
reject the call.
Once you accept the call, you need to
press the Side button to speak.
What can I do when
I’m on a PTT call?
Responding to a Call-Me alert
When you receive a Call-Me alert, you can
do any of the following:
When you make or receive a PTT call, the
Phone application’s Active Call View
appears.
•
•
•
Press and hold the Side button to make
a PTT call to the contact.
Press Send to make a phone call to
the contact.
Select Ignore with Text to address a
text message to the contact.
W H A T C A N
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N
A
P T T C A L L ?
142
Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N
6
Lets the initiator of the call convert
the PTT call to a phone call.
Contact’s
name
Lets you switch between calls
Call type
when more than one call is active.
Call status
NOTE The call status reads Calling when a
PTT call is in the process of connecting.
You can begin speaking once you hear the
tone. You don’t have to wait until the call
status changes to Active.
Button label
Use the 5-way
or stylus to select any
of the following onscreen buttons:
0
Turns off the speakerphone, which
Converting a PTT call into a phone call
is on by default. Use the earpiece
or the headset to continue the
conversation. You can also use
your Bluetooth headset or car kit.
When a PTT call is in progress, the person
who made the call can convert the call into
a phone call.
Turns the speakerphone on when it
is off. If your Ringer switch is set to
1
2
Tell the other participants that you’re
going to convert the PTT call into a
phone call and that they need to press
the Side button when they hear a tone.
Sound On
, the speakerphone is
on by default.
Places the current call on hold.
Keep in mind that if a PTT call
remains inactive for more than 30
seconds, it ends automatically.
3
4
Select Convert to cellular call
.
The other participants need to press the
Side button to continue the
conversation.
W H A T C A N
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N
A
P T T C A L L ?
143
Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N
6
The call now acts similar to a cellular phone
call, and participants no longer need to
press the Side button to talk.
TIP If you have more than one active call, you
can switch between the calls, but you cannot
conference two PTT calls or a PTT call and a
phone call. You can still conference two phone
calls.
Making a second PTT call
While a phone call or PTT call is in
progress, you can make a second PTT call.
TIP To return to the original call without placing
a second call, press Phone.
1
While a call is in progress, select
Hold
.
Using the Call Log
2
3
Press the Side button to start PTT.
Check the box(es) next to the contact(s)
or group you want to call.
You can use the Call Log in the Phone
application to view and make PTT calls.
A PTT call can be originated from the Call
Log. All PTT calls appear with a PTT icon.
4
5
Press and hold the Side button to make
the call.
To switch between the two calls, select
Swap
.
1
Press Phone
tab in the Phone application.
Select the Call Log tab.
Highlight the number you want to call.
to display the Main
NOTE Keep in mind that if a PTT call
remains inactive for more than 30 seconds,
it ends automatically.
2
3
NOTE You cannot redial a dynamic group
call that you initiated. When you select a
dynamic group call that you received, it
redials the entire group. You cannot redial a
Quick Group call regardless of whether you
initiated or received the call.
U S I N G T H E C A L L L O G
144
Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N
6
4
Press and hold the Side button to make Sending a voice message
a PTT call to the selected number.
1
2
Press the Side button to go to PTT.
Highlight the contact(s) or group you
want to send the voice message to.
PTT icon
showswho’s
available
3
Press Right
menu.
to open the pop-up
4
5
Select Voice Message.
Press and hold the Side button while
you record your voice message.
TIP When the Record/Pause button is
highlighted, you can also press Center on the
5-way to start and stop recording.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can access the Call Log by
pressing and holding the Side button when
you are not in the Push to Talk application.
Sending messages
You can send voice messages, text
messages, and Call-Me alerts to contacts
in your PTT list. Voice messages are a way
to send a message directly to the
recipient’s voicemail.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You cannot start a voice
message during a PTT call.
S E N D I N G M E S S A G E S
145
Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N
6
6
When you release the Side button,
Sending a Call-Me alert
select one of the following:
1
2
Press the Side button to go to PTT.
Highlight the contact you want to send
the Call-Me alert to.
Plays the voice message
Erases the voice message and
refreshes the screen so you can
rerecord the message
3
4
Press Right
to open the pop-up
menu.
Select Call-Me Alert.
Sends the voice message
DID YOU KNOW
?
A tone sounds every ten
Sending a text message
seconds until the recipient answers the alert
or six minutes elapse, whichever occurs first.
1
2
Press the Side button to go to PTT.
Highlight the contact or group you want
to send the text message to.
Viewing messages
3
Press Right
menu.
to open the pop-up
You can view all your PTT alerts and
deferred invitations in one place.
4
5
6
Select Text Message.
Enter the text.
1
2
3
Press the Side button to go to PTT.
Press Menu
Select Send.
.
NOTE When you address a text message
to a group that contains more than ten
members, the text message is sent only to
the first ten members in the group.
Select Options and then select
Message Center.
4
Do any of the following:
• To acknowledge and delete an
individual item, check the box next to
the item and select Clear.
V I E W I N G M E S S A G E S
146
Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N
6
• To acknowledge and delete all the
invitations, make calls, and send
items, select Clear All.
messages.
• To keep all of the items without
changing them, select Done.
NOTE Contacts who received an invitation
with your original name will continue to see
your original name when you communicate
with them. If you want a contact to see
your updated name, you must send the
contact a new invitation.
5
Select Done.
Customizing your
PTT settings
Sort contacts by availability: Places
contacts that are available to talk at the
top of your PTT list. If you do not check
this box, contacts are sorted
1
2
3
Press the Side button to go to PTT.
Press Menu
.
alphabetically.
Select Options and then select PTT
Settings.
Auto Accept Invitations: Accepts all
invitations automatically from individual
PTT subscribers or from groups, when
the corresponding box is checked.
5
Select OK.
4
Change any of the following settings:
Set Your Name: Enables you to modify
the name people see when you send
C U S T O M I Z I N G Y O U R P T T S E T T I N G S
147
Y O U R P U S H T O T A L K A P P L I C A T I O N
6
C U S T O M I Z I N G Y O U R P T T S E T T I N G S
148
CHAPTER
7
Your connections to the web
and wireless devices
You use the web for many things: driving directions, shopping,
news, web-based email. Now, with the AT&T network and the
built-in web browser, you can take the web with you almost
anywhere.
The built-in Bluetooth® feature of your Palm® Centro™ smart
device helps you easily set up wireless connections to a
number of devices, so you can enjoy the convenience of
cable-free connectivity. You can also use your Centro to
connect your computer to the Internet and to share contacts or
your favorite photos with other people.
Benefits
•
Carry the web with you
•
•
Connect your computer to the
Internet through your Centro
•
Store web pages for offline
viewing
Shop online for ringtones,
graphics, and multimedia files
•
Connect to Bluetooth headsets
and car kits
149
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
7
Viewing a web page
Web browser
To make viewing web pages on your
Centro a better experience, the web
The web browser on your Centro provides
quick and easy access to web pages. You
can view most of the sites you use on your
computer, including those with security
and advanced features, such as JavaScript
and frames. To browse the web, you must
activate data services from AT&T.
browser reformats web pages into a single
column and resizes images. In this
format—called Optimized Mode—you can
see most of the content without scrolling
left or right. You can also switch to Wide
Page Mode if you like.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can send email from a
DID YOU KNOW The security certificates and
?
web page on your Centro. Email addresses
appear as links on web pages. After you
configure an email application on your Centro,
you can select an email address link to create
a message to the selected address.
128-bit Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption
let you visit secure websites, like ones for
banking and using email. Some secure sites
also require specific browsers, so those may
not work with your web browser.
DID YOU KNOW The web browser supports
?
Optimized Mode
JavaScript, SSL strong encryption, and
cookies, but it does not support plug-ins (such
as Flash or Shockwave) or Java applets.
W E B B R O W S E R
151
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
7
3
Do any of the following to navigate
within the web page:
Wide Page Mode
View a page in wide layout format (as
on your computer): Press Menu
,
select Options, and then select Wide
Page Mode.
Scroll through the page: In Optimized
Mode (the default format) press Up
or Down . In Wide Page Mode, use all
buttons on the 5-way
any direction.
to scroll in
1
Press Applications
and select
Web
to open the Blazer web
Follow a link to another web page: In
Optimized Mode, highlight the link by
pressing Left or Right and then
browser. If necessary, select Yes to turn
on your phone, and Yes to connect to
the Internet.
press Center
to go to the selected
If you do not see either of these icons
in the title bar, data services are
not available in your current location and
you cannot connect to the Internet.
page. In Wide Page Mode, use the
stylus to select a link.
Submit a form: Enter the info and then
select the onscreen button to submit
the form. If the form doesn’t have an
2
Enter a web page address (URL) in the
Address Bar and select Go.
onscreen button, press Return
.
NOTE If you browse to a secure web
page, a lock
Address Bar.
icon appears in the
TIP To adjust the font size, open the Options
menu and select Font. To fit more text on the
screen, select Small. To make the text easier
to read, select Large.
W E B B R O W S E R
152
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
7
4
Use the 5-way
the following icons in the title bar:
to access any of
quickly. Note that a bookmark is different
from a saved page and different from a
0
Goes to your home page.
DID YOU KNOW
?
The predefined bookmarks
Opens a dialog box where you
can enter a web address or view
a list of recently viewed web
pages.
take you to pages that are optimized for your
Centro.
1
2
3
Go to the page you want to bookmark.
Goes back in order through
pages you viewed.
Press Menu
.
Goes forward in order through
pages you viewed.
Select Add Bookmark from the Page
menu.
Gets the latest version of the
current web page. This is
sometimes called refreshing the
web page.
4
5
Change the entries in the Name and
Description fields.
Select OK, and then select OK again.
Opens a list where you can
select Fast mode (no images or
style sheets) or Normal mode
(with images and style sheets).
Creating a bookmark
With bookmarks, you can instantly access
a web page without entering the address
every time. The web browser can store up
to 100 bookmarks or saved pages, allowing
you to open your favorite web pages
W E B B R O W S E R
153
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
7
Saving a page
You can use the web browser to save a
page for offline viewing, so you don’t need
a wireless connection to view it later.
1
2
3
4
Go to the page you want to save.
Press Menu
.
Select Save Page from the Page menu.
Select OK, and then select OK again.
2
Select the bookmark or saved page you
want to view.
Viewing bookmarks or saved pages
Bookmarks and saved pages both appear in
Bookmarks View. Saved pages are
indicated by a small triangle in the
upper-right corner of the bookmark.
TIP To go back to the last web page you
viewed without selecting a bookmark, select
Page View.
Editing or deleting a bookmark or saved
page
DID YOU KNOW You can make Bookmarks
?
View the default view when you open the
browser. Open the Options menu and select
Preferences. Select the Start With pick list
and select Bookmarks.
1
2
In Bookmarks View, press Menu
.
Select Edit Bookmarks from the
Bookmarks menu.
3
Select the bookmark you want to edit or
delete.
1
Select the Bookmarks View
the web page toolbar.
icon in
TIP If you can’t edit, delete, or beam a
bookmark, it is probably locked and these
actions are prohibited.
W E B B R O W S E R
154
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
7
4
5
Enter the desired changes or select
Delete.
page or move it to a different bookmark
page by dragging and dropping it on one
of the Bookmark Page
icons at the
Select OK.
bottom of the screen.
Arranging bookmarks and saved pages
5
Select OK.
Bookmarks View has ten pages where you
can store and arrange bookmarks and
saved pages in a way that works for you.
For example, you can store travel links on
Shopping at ATT Mall
AT&T Mall is a web-based storefront where
you can. select links to websites that list
one bookmark page, stock links on another, and sell ringtones, graphics, and
and business links on a third page.
multimedia files. When you select a link,
the web browser opens and displays a
website where you can buy items and
download them to your Centro.
1
In Bookmarks View, press Menu
.
1
2
3
Press Applications
ATT Mall
and select
.
Select the link to the type of items you
want to explore or buy.
Follow the website’s directions for
buying and downloading items.
2
Select Edit Bookmarks from the
Exploring AT&T Music
Bookmarks menu.
AT&T Music gives you access to a variety
of music resources.
3
4
Enter a title for this page of bookmarks.
Use the stylus to drag and drop a
bookmark into the desired slot. You can
move a bookmark within the current
1
Press Applications
AT&T Music
and select
.
W E B B R O W S E R
155
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
7
2
Select the link to the type of item you
want to explore or buy.
file to an expansion card, transfer it to your
computer using an expansion card reader
(sold separately), and view it on your
computer.
• Select Shop Music to shop for music
and ringtones.
• Select Music Player (Pocket Tunes
Deluxe™) so you can store, search,
and listen to music.
You can download files such as new
applications and choose to play or save
music and video files in many popular
formats—provided that the website
permits the downloading of files:
• Select Music ID to identify an artist
and song title.
• Select XM Radio to access a variety
of satellite radio channels.
Item
Supported File Types
JPG, WBMP, GIF, PNG
MP4, 3G2, ASF, WMV
MIDI, AAC, AAC+, MP3
MP3, WMA
Pictures
Videos
Ringtones
Music
• Select Community to connect to the
fan sites of popular artists and hit
bands.
Downloading files from a web page
The web browser lets you download files
that are recognized by one of the
applications on your Centro. When you
download a file, you can open it in the
application that recognizes the file. For
example, if you download an MP3 file, you
can listen to it later in the Pocket Tunes™
application.
TIP You can also access software and other
downloads using the Downloads bookmark.
1
2
Go to the page with the link to the file
you want to download.
Do one of the following:
• In Optimized Mode, press Left or
Right to highlight the link to the
If a file is not recognized by any application
on your Centro, you cannot open it on your
Centro. You can, however, download the
file, and then press Center
.
W E B B R O W S E R
156
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
7
• In Wide Page Mode, tap the link with
your stylus.
2
Once streaming begins, playback starts
automatically. Use the following
controls when viewing or listening:
3
4
If prompted, select what you want to do
with the file: Play, Save To Device, or
Save To Card.
• Select
to return to the web page
containing the streamed content.
Select Yes.
• Select
pause playback.
or press Center
to
to
TIP You can also save an image from a web
page by tapping and holding it with the stylus.
• Select
or press Center
resume playback after pausing.
• A few seconds after playback begins,
the toolbar is hidden and you can view
the content on the full screen. Press
Streaming files from a web page
The web browser lets you stream files that
are recognized by one of the applications
on your Centro. For example, you can
choose to play music and video files in
many popular formats (MP3, WMA, WMV).
Up
or Down
to display the
toolbar; press Up
or Down
again to hide the toolbar again.
• Press the Volume button on the side
of your Centro to adjust the volume.
1
When the web browser recognizes
streamed content on a web page, it
Copying text from a web page
displays a Play
listen to the streamed content, select
Play
icon. To view or
You can copy text from a web page and
paste it into other applications.
.
1
Use the stylus to highlight the text you
want to copy.
TIP When the web browser recognizes
streamed content that is not supported by any
of the applications on your Centro, it displays a
“Media type not supported” message.
2
3
Press Menu
.
Select Edit, and then select Copy.
W E B B R O W S E R
157
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
7
4
Go to the app in which you want to
paste the text, and position the cursor
where you want to paste the text.
4
5
Check or uncheck the Wrap Search box
to indicate whether you want the search
to wrap from the end of the page to the
beginning when the end is reached.
5
6
Press Menu
.
Select Find to start the search.
Select Edit, and then select Paste.
Customizing your web browser settings
DID YOU KNOW If the web browser does not
?
recognize a phone number as dialable, you
can copy the phone number (as text) and
paste it into the Dial Pad (see Dialing from a
1
2
In Page View, press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
3
Select Page and set any of the following
preferences:
Returning to recently viewed pages
The History list stores the addresses of the
last 100 pages you visited. Items in the
History list are sorted chronologically.
1
2
3
In Page View, press Menu
.
Select History from the Page menu.
Select the web page you want to load.
Finding text on a web page
Start With: Determines which view
appears when you open the browser.
1
2
In Page View, press Menu
.
Select Find Text on Page from the
Home Page: Sets the page that appears
Page menu.
when you select
.
3
Enter the text you want to find.
Restore Default: Selects the original
home page, if you changed it.
W E B B R O W S E R
158
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
7
Show Address Bar: Sets whether the
Disable JavaScript: Bypasses
JavaScript elements on the web pages
you view.
web address appears in Page View.
When it is visible, you can select the
pick list to go to a previously viewed
page or enter a URL directly from Page
View.
Tap and Drag: Determines whether
dragging the stylus selects text or
scrolls through the contents of the
page.
4
Select General and set any of the
following preferences:
Normal mode/Fast mode: Determines
whether a web page appears as
designed (Normal mode) or with some
of the items removed for faster display.
Selecting Fast mode gives you the
following options:
• Disable cascading style sheets:
Determines whether style sheets are
applied when you load a web page.
When style sheets are disabled,
pages download faster, but you may
lose some of the formatting.
Auto-complete: Determines whether
the web browser suggests text, based
on your previous entries, when you
begin entering info.
KEY TERM Cascading Style Sheet (CSS)
A file that governs design elements of a web
page, such as its fonts, colors, and layout.
Disable cookies: Determines whether
websites can store personalized info on
your Centro. Some sites do not work
properly if you select this option.
• Don’t download images!
Determines whether images appear
when you load a web page. If you
W E B B R O W S E R
159
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
7
select not to view images, you can
still see any image by selecting the
placeholder box on the web page.
Cache: Indicates how much memory is
being used by your cache to store
recent pages and history. To free up this
memory, select Clear Cache.
TIP Lots of pretty graphics slowing you down?
Browse the web faster by enabling the Don’t
download images! option.
Clear cache on exit: Determines
whether the cache clears each time you
exit the web browser.
5
Select Advanced and set any of the
following preferences:
Set Proxy: Sets up a proxy server to
access the Internet. If your connection
requires a proxy server, please contact
your Internet service provider or IT
administrator for this information.
6
Select OK.
Connecting your
computer to the
Internet through
your Centro™
Set memory limit for storing pages:
Sets the amount of memory used for
your cache. Pages are cached so that
they load faster the next time you view
them.
Dial-up networking (DUN) is the feature
that converts your Centro into a modem so
that you can access the Internet from your
computer. If your computer is enabled with
Cookies: Indicates how much memory
is being used by cookies. To free up this
memory, select Clear Cookies.
C O N N E C T I N G Y O U R C O M P U T E R T O T H E I N T E R N E T T H R O U G H Y O U R C E N T R O ™
160
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
7
Bluetooth wireless technology, you can set
up your Centro as a wireless modem using
the built-in Bluetooth technology.
4
Select Trusted Devices.
The following procedures describe the
process of setting up your Centro as a
wireless modem using the built-in
Bluetooth technology.
TIP If your computer is not enabled with
Bluetooth wireless technology, you need to
purchase a wireless Bluetooth adapter
accessory for your computer to use this
feature.
5
Select Add Device. The discovery icon
appears, indicating that the discovery
process is active.
6
7
Select your computer from the Trusted
Devices list, and then select OK.
Creating a partnership between your
Centro and your computer
Make up a passkey, enter it on the
Bluetooth Security screen, and then
select OK. The passkey can be up to
16 numbers.
1
Make sure that your computer’s
Bluetooth setting is on and that your
computer is ready to create a Bluetooth
partnership. Check the documentation
that came with your computer to find
and change these settings.
NOTE You need this passkey in the next
step, so be sure to write it down exactly.
We recommend that you use a passkey of
16 numbers, where possible, to improve
the security of your Centro. The longer the
passkey, the more difficult it is for the
passkey to be deciphered.
2
3
On your Centro, press
Applications
Bluetooth
and select
.
Select Bluetooth On if it is not already
selected, and then select Setup
Devices.
C O N N E C T I N G Y O U R C O M P U T E R T O T H E I N T E R N E T T H R O U G H Y O U R C E N T R O ™
161
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
7
8
9
Enter the same passkey on your
computer when prompted.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Verify that DUN is
enabled on your computer. See the
documentation that came with your
computer for details.
Select Done, and then select Done
again to return to the Bluetooth screen.
1
Open the Bluetooth application on your
computer and let it locate the Centro
you paired it with in the previous
procedure.
Setting up your computer for a
Bluetooth® DUN connection
Follow the instructions from the
manufacturer of your Bluetooth adapter to
enable DUN.
2
Double-click the icon or option
representing your Centro. Your
computer connects to your Centro and
shows that DUN services are available.
Accessing the Internet using a Bluetooth
DUN connection
3
4
Double-click the DUN icon.
Enter the following settings:
• Dial: *99***1#
The steps for accessing the Internet on
your computer may vary depending on your
operating system and how Bluetooth
wireless technology is set up on your
computer—for example, if it is built-in
versus if you are using a Bluetooth adapter.
If you need additional info, check your
computer’s documentation for how to set
up Bluetooth technology to access the
Internet using a DUN connection.
• User Name:
ISP@CINGULARGPRS.COM
• Password: CINGULAR1
5
Click Dial. Once the connection is
successfully established, you can
browse the Internet on your computer
or download your email.
TIP You may need to use a virtual private
network (VPN) to access corporate email.
Check with your system administrator for
more information.
C O N N E C T I N G Y O U R C O M P U T E R T O T H E I N T E R N E T T H R O U G H Y O U R C E N T R O ™
162
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
7
Terminating a Bluetooth DUN Internet
session
TIP If you get a message asking whether you
want your computer to remember the dial text
for this connection, we recommend that you
select Yes . This avoids errors and the
inconvenience of entering the dial text for
every session.
It is important to end a Bluetooth DUN
session after you finish using it. Ending the
DUN session lets you use the wireless
features of your Centro that require a data
connection, it frees up the Bluetooth
feature so that you can connect to other
Bluetooth devices, and it optimizes battery
life, too.
6
Look for a network connection icon in
the taskbar at the bottom of your
computer screen to verify that you are
connected.
1
On your computer, right-click the icon or
option representing your Centro.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can check the status of the
2
Click Disconnect.
connection by right-clicking the Bluetooth
network icon in the taskbar.
Connecting with
Bluetooth devices
NOTE When a DUN connection is active,
you cannot use data services on your
Centro. For example, you cannot browse
the Web, or send or receive email
messages. Also, any scheduled automatic
email retrievals do not take place.
With the built-in Bluetooth wireless
technology on your Centro, you can
Receiving or sending phone calls suspends
the DUN session. The session resumes
when the call is ended.
connect to a number of Bluetooth devices,
including a hands-free device such as a
headset or car kit, a printer, or a GPS
receiver, as well as to other Centro smart
devices and handhelds that are equipped
with Bluetooth wireless technology. If your
C O N N E C T I N G W I T H B L U E T O O T H D E V I C E S
163
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
7
computer is enabled with Bluetooth
wireless technology, you can also
2
Select Bluetooth On.
synchronize wirelessly or use your phone
to connect your computer to the Internet.
You can create a list of Bluetooth devices
that you trust to communicate with your
Centro. When communicating with trusted
devices, your Centro skips the discovery
process and creates a secure link as long
as the device is within range. Bluetooth
range is up to 30 feet depending on
3
(Optional) Enter a device name that
identifies your Centro when it is
environmental conditions, including
obstacles, radio interference from nearby
electronic equipment, and other factors.
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.
NOTE Use the same device name for all
your Bluetooth connections. If you change
the device name, you need to re-create any
partnerships you’ve already created.
When you configure a hands-free device,
as described previously in Connecting to a
hands-free device automatically appears in
your Trusted Devices list. Follow the steps
in this section to add other devices to your
Trusted Devices list, such as a friend’s
handheld.
4
5
Select Setup Devices.
Select Trusted Devices.
Requesting a connection with another
Bluetooth device
1
Press Applications
Bluetooth
and select
.
C O N N E C T I N G W I T H B L U E T O O T H D E V I C E S
164
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
7
IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices
have a predefined passkey. If your device
has a predefined passkey, you can find it in
the documentation for that device. Other
devices provide a screen where you enter
a passkey that you make up. In either case,
you must use the same passkey on both
your Centro and the other Bluetooth
device. We recommend that, where
possible, you make up a passkey of 16
6
Select Add Device. The Discovery icon
appears, indicating that the discovery
process is active.
alphanumeric characters (letters and
numerals only) to improve the security of
your Centro. The longer the passkey, the
more difficult it is for the passkey to be
deciphered.
7
8
Select the Show pick list and select
Nearby devices.
If the device you want to add doesn’t
appear on the Discovery Results list,
make sure that the other device is ready
to receive a connection request (see the
device’s documentation), and then
select Find More on your Centro to
search again.
10 Select Done.
Accepting a connection from another
Bluetooth device
TIP For the Centro to be visible to Bluetooth
devices, the Bluetooth setting must be set to
On and visibility must be set to Visible or
Temporary.
9
Enter the same passkey on your Centro
and on the Bluetooth device, and select
OK.
C O N N E C T I N G W I T H B L U E T O O T H D E V I C E S
165
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
7
1
2
Press Applications
Bluetooth
Select Bluetooth On.
and select
After you’ve finished using this setting,
remember to change it back to Hidden.
.
TIP Use the Visible option only when you need
your Centro to be accessible for an extended
period of time. For short-term accessibility,
use the Temporary option.
Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices
that are not on your Trusted Devices list
to request a connection with your
Centro during the next two minutes.
Your Centro reverts to the Hidden
setting and becomes inaccessible to
other devices after two minutes.
3
(Optional) Enter a device name that
identifies your Centro when it is
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.
Hidden: Allows only devices with which
you have previously formed a
partnership to request a connection
with your Centro. New devices cannot
request a connection.
NOTE Use the same device name for all
your Bluetooth connections. If you change
the device name, you need to re-create any
partnerships you’ve already created.
5
Enter the same passkey on your Centro
and on the Bluetooth device.
4
Select the Visibility pick list and select
one of the following:
Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that
are not on your Trusted Devices list to
request a connection with your Centro.
Your Centro remains accessible to other
devices until you turn this option off.
C O N N E C T I N G W I T H B L U E T O O T H D E V I C E S
166
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
7
IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices,
such as headsets and GPS receivers, have
a predefined passkey. If your device has a
predefined passkey, you can find it in the
documentation for that device. Other
devices provide a screen where you enter
a passkey that you make up. In either case,
you must use the same passkey on both
your Centro and the other Bluetooth
device. We recommend that, where
possible, you make up a passkey of 16
alphanumeric characters (letters and
numerals only) to improve the security of
your Centro. The longer the passkey, the
more difficult it is for the passkey to be
deciphered.
6
7
(Optional) Check the Add to trusted
device list box if you want to form a
partnership with the requesting device.
Select OK.
C O N N E C T I N G W I T H B L U E T O O T H D E V I C E S
167
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S
7
C O N N E C T I N G W I T H B L U E T O O T H D E V I C E S
168
CHAPTER
8
Your photos, videos, and
music
Do you have a wallet bulging with photos of friends, family, pets,
and your most recent vacation?
Are you tired of carrying both your MP3 player and your phone?
Your Palm® Centro™ smart device solves both problems. You can
keep your favorite photos right on your Centro—videos, too. And
there’s no need to carry an expensive MP3 player; you can play
music on your Centro. Simply transfer songs onto your Centro or
an expansion card and then listen through your headphones (cards
and headphones sold separately).
Benefits
•
Never be far from your favorite
people, places, and songs
•
No separate photo viewer, MP3, or
CD player required
•
Organize your photos, videos, and
songs
169
In this chapter
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
8
1
2
Press Applications
Camera
and select
Camera and
Camcorder
.
By default, the Camera application
stores pictures you take in the PALM
folder on your expansion card (if a card
is inserted). Otherwise, Camera stores
pictures in the PALM album on your
Centro. To store a picture in a different
location, select one of the following:
Your Centro comes with an easy-to-use,
built-in, 1.3 Megapixel camera with 2x
digital zoom. You can use the camera to
take and view pictures and videos and
send them to your friends and family. To
add a personal touch to your Centro, use
your pictures as your wallpaper for the
Main tab in the Phone application and as
caller ID images.
<Album name>: Stores the picture in
the selected album. The storage
location is based on the location of the
album (Centro or expansion card).
New Albums: Opens a dialog box
where you can enter an album name
and select the storage location (Centro
or expansion card).
In addition to taking pictures and videos,
you can receive and view pictures and
videos, send pictures and videos as email
attachments or multimedia messages
(MMS), and use pictures to personalize
your Centro (such as wallpaper or picture
for details). You can also move pictures and
videos to a computer by synchronizing your
Centro with your computer.
Taking a picture
You can store pictures on your Centro or on
an expansion card.
C A M E R A A N D C A M C O R D E R
171
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
8
Saves the picture in the location
you selected in step 2.
TIP The default camera resolution is SXGA
(1280 x 1024). VGA (640 x 480) and QVGA
(320 x 240) resolutions are also supported. To
view these settings before you take a picture,
press Menu.
Deletes the picture.
Opens a dialog box where you
can select how you want to send
the picture: Messaging,
Bluetooth® wireless technology,
or Email. The receiving device
must support the method you
select.
3
4
Find your subject in the screen on your
Centro (the lens is on the back of your
Centro).
(Optional) To get a close-up of your
subject, press Up
to select 2x. Press
Down
to return to 1x.
Lets you add a voice caption.
5
6
Press Center
to capture the picture.
Select any of the following icons:
TIP To add an audio caption later, open the
picture and then select Audio Caption from
the Photo menu.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can personalize a picture.
Open the Photo menu, select Draw on, and
then use the drawing tools to add your own
personal touch. When you save the picture,
you can replace the original or save a copy.
Recording a video
You can store videos on your Centro or on
an expansion card.
C A M E R A A N D C A M C O R D E R
172
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
8
1
Press Applications
Camcorder
and select
.
TIP The video recording screen displays the
approximate recording time you have left
based on the space available on your Centro
or expansion card. Actual recording time may
vary depending on how fast you are moving,
how many colors you are recording, and so
on.
TIP The default camcorder resolution is CIF
(352 x 288), and QCIF (176 x 144) is also
supported. To view these settings before you
capture a video, press Menu.
2
By default, the Camcorder application
stores videos you record in the PALM
folder on your expansion card (if a card
is inserted). Otherwise, Camcorder
stores pictures in the PALM album on
your Centro. To store a video in a
different location, select one of the
following:
3
Find your subject in the screen on your
Centro (the lens is on the back of your
Centro).
4
5
Press Center
After you finish recording, press
Center again to stop.
to start recording.
<Album name>: Stores the video in the
selected album. The storage location is
based on the location of the album
(Centro or expansion card).
New Albums: Opens a dialog box
where you can enter an album name
and select the storage location (Centro
or expansion card).
C A M E R A A N D C A M C O R D E R
173
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
8
6
Select any of the following:
TIP During playback, tap and drag the
progress indicator bar to jump to a different
section of the video. Select Pause to pause
video playback.
Customizing your Camera settings
You can customize the built-in camera’s
settings for your Centro.
1
Press Applications
and select
Camera
or Camcorder .
Plays the video, so you can
review it.
2
Press Menu
. If you are in Camera
View, the Photo Settings screen
appears. If you are in Camcorder View,
the Video Settings screen appears.
Saves the video in the location
you selected in step 2.
Deletes the video.
3
Set any of the following preferences:
Effects: Sets the color palette for the
current picture or video. You cannot
change an item’s palette after you take
the picture or video.
Opens a dialog box where you
can select how you want to send
the video: Messaging, Bluetooth,
or Email. The receiving device
must support the method you
select and video messages.
Prompt sound: (Pictures only) Sets the
sound that plays before you take
the picture.
Opens a dialog box where you
can adjust the volume during
playback.
Shutter sound: Determines whether a
sound plays when you take a picture.
C A M E R A A N D C A M C O R D E R
174
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
8
Microphone: (Videos only) Turns the
microphone on and off so that you can
record videos with or without sound.
Resolution: Sets the default size for
newly captured pictures or videos.
Date stamp: (Pictures only) Determines
whether the date the picture is taken
appears on your pictures.
4
Select Done.
Review photos/videos: Determines
whether you can review pictures or
videos before saving them and how
quickly they are automatically saved.
Pictures & Videos
Auto naming: Assigns a name to a
series of pictures to be captured, such
as Seattle001, Seattle002, and so on.
Viewing a picture
In addition to viewing the pictures you
capture with the built-in camera, you can
view pictures captured on many popular
digital cameras or downloaded from the
Internet. Your Centro supports the
following picture formats:
•
•
•
•
JPG
TIF
BMP
GIF
P I C T U R E S
&
V I D E O S
175
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
8
1
2
Press Applications
Pics&Videos
and select
Viewing a video
.
In addition to viewing the videos you
Select the album that contains the
picture you want to see.
capture with the built-in camcorder, you
can view videos captured on many popular
digital cameras. You can also play the audio
portion of multimedia files. Your Centro
supports the following types of video files:
TIP To view an album from an expansion card,
insert the card and select the album from the
Album list. If the items on the card are not
grouped into albums, select the card name
from the list.
•
•
3GP (with H.263 video and AMR audio)
3G2 (with MPEG-4 video and QCELP
audio)
3
4
Select the picture you want to view.
•
•
•
•
MP4 (with MPEG-4/H.264 video and
MP3/AAC/AAC+ audio)
Press Right or Left to scroll to the
next item in the album.
MPG (with MPEG-1 video and MPEG-1
audio)
DID YOU KNOW To see the outer edges of a
?
M4V (with MPEG-4/H.264 video and
MP3/AAC/AAC+ audio)
picture that may not be visible, use the stylus
to tap and drag the picture in any direction.
ASF (with MPEG-4 video and
IMA-ADPCM audio)
5
6
If the picture has a voice caption, select
to hear it.
•
AVI (with MJPEG video and PCM audio)
Tap the picture or press Center
return to Thumbnail View.
to
1
Press Applications
Pics&Videos
and select
.
2
3
Select the album that contains the video
you want to see.
TIP In Thumbnail View, you can group photos
or videos to more easily locate them. Select
one of the grouping options from the View
menu.
Select the video you want to view.
Playback begins automatically.
P I C T U R E S
&
V I D E O S
176
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
8
4
5
Hold down Right or Left to seek
within the current video, or press Right
or Left to scroll to the next item in
the album.
TIP To set slide show options such as
background music and transitions, open the
Options menu and select Slideshow
Setting. Keep in mind that background music
overrides audio captions when you’re running
a slide show. Background music for a slide
show also overrides any music that might be
playing using the Pocket Tunes™ Deluxe
application on your Centro.
Press Center
to return to Thumbnail
View.
DID YOU KNOW If you pause video playback
?
and then close the video, the video starts
where you left off the next time you play it.
Sending pictures or videos
Viewing a slide show
You can send pictures or videos to an
email address or to other devices that
support picture and video messaging.
1
Press Applications
Pics&Videos
Select the album you want to view.
Press Menu , select Options, and
and select
.
2
3
1
From the Album list, select the album
that contains the picture(s) or video(s)
you want to send.
then select Auto-hide Toolbar Off if
you want to see the toolbar.
2
3
Select Send
.
4
5
Press Space
to start the slide
Select the pictures or videos to send, or
select Select All to send the entire
album. (A plus sign [+] appears next to
selected items.)
show.
Press Center
to return to the
previous view.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You cannot send copyrighted
pictures or videos that appear with a Lock icon
in Thumbnail View or in the Picture list.
P I C T U R E S
&
V I D E O S
177
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
8
4
Select Send.
album. (A + appears next to selected
items.)
5
6
Select Copy.
Select the Copy items to pick list and
select whether you want to copy the
selected items to your device or to an
expansion card.
Indicates that
a picture is
selected
5
Select how you want to send the
picture or video: Messaging,
Bluetooth, or Email.
Copying a picture or video
You can copy pictures or videos into
another album. You can also copy pictures
and videos between your Centro and an
expansion card.
7
8
Select the Into album pick list and
select the album you want to copy the
selected items to.
1
From the Album list, select the album
that contains the picture(s) or video(s)
you want to copy.
Select Copy.
TIP You can also move pictures and videos
between albums. Open the Photo (or Video)
menu and select Move to. The remaining
steps are the same as those for copying
pictures, but use the Move commands
instead of the Copy commands.
2
3
Press Menu
.
Select Copy to from the Photo (or
Video) menu.
4
Select the pictures or videos to copy, or
select Select All to copy the entire
P I C T U R E S
&
V I D E O S
178
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
8
Organizing pictures and videos
1
Display the picture you want to save as
wallpaper.
1
2
3
Open the album you want to organize.
Press Menu
2
3
Press Menu
.
.
Select Options, and then select Save
as Wallpaper.
Select Album, and then select Add to
album or Remove from album.
4
When the confirmation message
appears, confirm by selecting Yes, or
decline by selecting No.
4
5
Select the pictures or videos to add or
remove, or select Select All to add or
remove the entire album. (A plus sign
indicates that you want to add the item.
An X indicates that you want to remove
the item.)
Adding a picture to a contact entry
1
Display the picture you want to add to a
contact.
Select Add or Remove.
2
3
Press Menu
.
DID YOU KNOW You can also open the Album
list from Camera View or Camcorder View by
selecting the icon in the lower-left corner.
TIP Install the Palm® Files application from the
Getting Started CD to easily browse and
manage files on an expansion card.
?
Select Options, and then select Save
as Contact.
4
Select the contact you want to add this
picture to.
Rotating a picture
TIP To change the name, add a caption, or
view other picture or video information,
highlight (or open) the item, open the Photo
(or Video) menu, and select Details.
1
2
3
4
Display the picture you want to rotate.
Press Menu
.
Select Rotate from the Photo menu.
Select the orientation.
Saving a picture as wallpaper
You can select a picture to use as wallpaper
for the Main tab in the Phone application.
P I C T U R E S
&
V I D E O S
179
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
8
Deleting a picture or video
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To use your
computer to view and edit videos you
captured on your Centro, you must first
install QuickTime from the Getting Started
CD.
1
Open the album that contains the
picture(s) or video(s) you want to delete.
2
3
Press Menu
.
Select Delete from the Photo (or
Video) menu.
On a Windows computer, you can view
and edit synchronized pictures and videos
in the Palm Media desktop application.
Open Palm® Desktop software and click
the Media icon. You can refer to the
Palm Desktop Online Help for information
about using the Palm Media desktop
application.
4
Select the pictures or videos that you
want to delete, or select Select All to
delete the entire album. (An X appears
next to selected items.)
5
6
Select Delete.
Select Delete to confirm the deletion.
TIP You can also highlight a picture or video in
Thumbnail View, and then press Backspace to
delete the highlighted item.
Pocket Tunes™
Deluxe
Viewing pictures and videos on your
computer
You can listen to music through the
speaker on the back of your Centro or
through a stereo headset or headphones
(stereo headphone adapter or 2.5mm
stereo headphone or headset required,
sold separately). To listen to music on your
Centro, transfer the music files to your
Centro or an expansion card. After you
When you synchronize your Centro, your
pictures and videos are copied to your
desktop computer. You can view pictures in
JPG format and videos in MPEG-4 format
(3G2 file extension). You can email them to
friends using your desktop email
application.
P O C K E T T U N E S ™ D E L U X E
180
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
8
transfer the music files, you can play them If album art is available, it appears in a
using Pocket Tunes™ Deluxe on your
Centro. Pocket Tunes Deluxe can also be
found under the name Music Player. (See
corner of the Pocket Tunes Deluxe display.
When you select the album art, it expands
to fill the screen. Select the album art again
to return it to a corner of the screen.
Pocket Tunes Deluxe supports MP3,
WMA, Protected WMA, AAC, and AAC+
files; you can transfer these file types to
your device. For more information about
Pocket Tunes Deluxe, go to
BEFORE YOU BEGIN On a Mac, you need
a microSD expansion card (sold separately)
to listen to music on your Centro. You
cannot transfer music files from your Mac
directly onto your Centro.
1
2
Connect your Centro to your computer
with the USB sync cable.
DID YOU KNOW
?
If a call comes in when you’re
listening to music, you can take the call and
the music pauses automatically. After you
finish the call, the music starts again.
On your Centro, press
Applications
pTunes
and select
.
3
4
If you are transferring music files from a
Mac, insert an expansion card into your
Centro. This step is optional for
Windows users.
Transferring music files from your
computer
If your music files are already on your
computer’s hard drive, you just need to
transfer them onto your Centro to listen to
them with Pocket Tunes Deluxe.
Do one of the following:
Windows: Open Windows Media
Player on your computer. Select the
Sync tab, and select Set Up Sync.
Select Finish. In the Sync tab, select
the files and play lists you want to sync
If an expansion card is inserted into the
Centro, Windows Media Player copies the
music files to the expansion card. If you
don’t have an expansion card inserted, the
music files are copied to your Centro.
P O C K E T T U N E S ™ D E L U X E
181
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
8
manually. Select Start Sync. The files
are transferred to your Centro.
Transferring music from a CD to your
Centro
WINDOWS ONLY
NOTE Do not press the sync button on
your cable. Windows Media Player
transfers the files, so there’s no need to do
anything.
1
2
On your computer, open Windows
Media Player.
Insert the music CD into your
computer’s CD drive.
Mac: Drag and drop the files onto the
Send To Handheld droplet in the Palm
folder. Select your device name, the file
name, and the destination (card). Click
OK. Synchronize your Centro with your
computer. Be patient; transferring music
to an expansion card can take several
minutes.
3
4
5
Select the Rip tab.
Select Rip Music.
Transfer files to your Centro as
MAC ONLY
1
2
On your Mac, open iTunes.
Insert the music CD into the CD drive
on your Mac.
3
4
Click the Import button in the
upper-right corner of the iTunes window.
TIP You can also use a card reader accessory
(sold separately) to transfer music files from
your computer to your expansion card. Create
a Music_Audio folder in the root directory of
the card, and store your music files in this
folder.
When the songs have been imported,
click the Eject Disk button in the
lower-right corner of the iTunes window.
5
Transfer the files to your Centro as
P O C K E T T U N E S ™ D E L U X E
182
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
8
Listening to music on your Centro
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can also press Space to
CAUTION Protect your hearing. Listening
to this device at full volume for a long
period of time can damage your hearing.
pause and resume playback, as well as use
the 5-way to navigate among songs or pause
and resume playback.
1
Make sure the Ringer switch is set to
more information.
NOTE To adjust the volume during
playback, press the Volume button on the
side of your Centro.
2
Press Applications
pTunes
and select
.
Progress
indicator
Play/Pause
Volume
TIP You can change the settings on your
Centro so that pressing and holding the Side
button opens Pocket Tunes Deluxe. See
Reassigning buttons for details.
3
Use the 5-way
to access any of
the following icons:
Play: Plays or resumes playback of
the current song.
Next
song
Choose
song
Previous
song
Next song: Plays the next song.
Previous song: Plays the previous
song.
Pocket Tunes Deluxe continues playing
until it reaches the end of your list or until
you select Pause
play even if you switch to another
application or turn off your screen. If you
want to stop playing music when you exit
. Music continues to
Choose song: Displays a list of
songs to choose from.
Pause: Pauses playback.
P O C K E T T U N E S ™ D E L U X E
183
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
8
Pocket Tunes Deluxe, open the
Background Prefs menu and uncheck the
Enable background play box, and then
select OK.
TIP To play songs from a playlist, open Pocket
Tunes, select Choose Songs, and then select
Playlists. Select the playlist you want to play,
and then select All.
Creating a playlist
Editing a playlist
If you want to play a group of songs in a
particular order, you can create a playlist.
1
Press Applications
pTunes
Press Menu
and select
.
1
Press Applications
pTunes
Press Menu
and select
2
3
.
.
Select Actions, and then select
2
3
.
Manage Playlists.
Select Actions, and then select
4
5
Highlight a playlist, and then select Edit.
Manage Playlists.
Do any of the following:
4
5
Select New, and then enter a name for
the playlist.
• To delete a song from the playlist,
select the song and then select
Remove.
Select Add Song. Select the songs you
want to include on the playlist.
• To add a song, select Add Song,
select the songs you want to add, and
then select OK.
• To move a song up or down one slot,
select a song and then select Up or
Down.
6
Select Save List.
6
Select Save List.
P O C K E T T U N E S ™ D E L U X E
184
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C
8
P O C K E T T U N E S ™ D E L U X E
186
CHAPTER
9
Your personal information
organizer
Say good-bye to paper calendars and throw away those
scribbled to-do lists. Your Palm® Centro™ smart device is all you
need to organize your personal information and keep it with you
wherever you go.
You never lose your information, even if your battery is
completely drained. All your personal info is backed up each
time you synchronize, and your info is kept private when you
use the security features on your Centro. Also, you can easily
share info with others electronically.
Benefits
•
Track current, future, and past
appointments
•
•
Set reminders for appointments,
birthdays, important tasks, and
more
•
Make to-do lists that get done
Before you call your friend in
London, check the time
187
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
9
overdue or due today. If there’s room,
Agenda View also lists events on future
dates.
Calendar
Calendar is a powerful organizer application
that helps you manage your schedule. You
can view your calendar by day, week, or
month, or as an agenda list that combines
your Tasks list and email notifications with
your appointments. Schedule repeating
meetings or a block of vacation time by
creating an event that repeats at an interval
you specify. Color-code your appointments
by category and add notes with helpful
information.
Day View: Shows your daily schedule one
day at a time.
Week View: Shows your schedule for an
entire week. The time frames are based on
the Start Time and End Time settings in
Calendar Preferences.
Month View: Shows your schedule for a
whole month.
DID YOU KNOW If your company uses
?
Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, you may be
able to wirelessly synchronize Calendar
events directly with the server. See Working
information.
In most Calendar views, you can do the
following:
•
Open the Options menu and select
Year View to view a calendar for an
entire year.
Displaying your calendar
Press Calendar
repeatedly to cycle
through the various views:
•
Use the 5-way
to go to another
day, week, month, or year—based on
the current view. (Not available in
Agenda View.)
Agenda View: Shows your daily schedule,
the number of unread email messages,
and any items on your Tasks list that are
C A L E N D A R
189
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
9
•
Select Go To, and then select a date
from the calendar. (Not available in
Agenda View.)
4
Using the keyboard, enter a starting
hour and minute for the event, such as
545 for 5:45.
5
6
Select the End Time box and enter the
ending hour and minute for the event.
Creating an event
To assign a time zone to the event,
select the Time Zone pick list and
select a city in the time zone you want.
TIP If you have several appointments to enter,
it’s more efficient to use Palm® Desktop
software or Microsoft Outlook on your
computer and then synchronize your Centro
with your computer. For more information,
7
8
Select OK.
Enter a description for the event.
IMPORTANT If you use Palm Desktop
software, do not add time zones to your
events. Palm Desktop does not support
time zones.
1
2
Press Calendar
appears.
until Day View
Select Go To and then select the
desired day.
If you use Microsoft Outlook, you can use
the time zone feature, but you must install
the conduit that came with your Centro (or
a subsequent update) on all the computers
with which you sync your Centro. Chapura
PocketMirror and other earlier Microsoft
Outlook conduits do not support time
zones.
Selected
date
Selected
day
3
Select New.
C A L E N D A R
190
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
9
4
Select OK.
TIP To automatically assign a time zone to your
events, open the Options menu, select
Preferences, and check the New events use
time zones box. All your new events will be
assigned to your local time zone (existing
events aren’t affected), and you can change
the time zone setting for individual events.
Type of time
units
Number of
time units
TIP If you want your events with time zones to
stay at the same time in Calendar, regardless
of the time zone you are in, go to Date & Time
Preferences, select the Automatically set
pick list, and select Date and time. If you
select Date, time and time zone, the event
time shifts if you travel to a different time
information.
DID YOU KNOW
?
When an alarm occurs, the
Alert dialog box displays all your pending
alerts. Select an alert description to jump to
that item, or check the box to clear that alert.
Creating an untimed event
Adding an alarm to an event
An untimed event, such as a holiday or
deadline, does not occur at a particular
time.
1
2
3
In Calendar, select the event.
Select Details.
Check the Alarm box and select the
number of minutes, hours, or days
before the event you would like to
receive the alarm.
1
2
3
Press Calendar
Day View.
until you are in
Press Left or Right to go to the
date of the event.
Make sure no times are highlighted.
TIP The alarm for untimed events is defined by
minutes, days, or hours before midnight of the
date of the event.
C A L E N D A R
191
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
9
4
Enter a description for the event.
A diamond appears next to the
description of an untimed event.
select Other to define a custom
interval.
4
Select OK.
Scheduling a repeating event
Repeating
event
TIP To enter a birthday or anniversary, add this
info to the person’s Contacts entry and it
automatically appears in your Calendar.
TIP To enter a holiday, create an untimed
event. Then, from the Details screen, select
Every year as the repeat interval.
1
2
3
Create an event, and then select it.
DID YOU KNOW
?
If you sync with Microsoft
Outlook and your events include other people,
a With field appears in the Details dialog box
and your attendee info appears in this field
after you sync.
Select Details.
Select the Repeat pick list, and then
select a repeat interval. If the interval
you need doesn’t appear on the list,
C A L E N D A R
192
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
9
Color-coding your schedule
Changing or deleting an event
Use color-coding to quickly spot various
types of events. For example, make
appointments with family green,
co-workers blue, and friends red. Follow
these steps to create a category and
assign it a color code.
1
Select the event you want to edit or
delete.
2
3
Select Details.
In addition to the settings covered
earlier in this chapter, you can also
change any of the following settings:
1
In Day View, select an event description
or select an empty time slot.
Date and Time: Displays when the
event takes place. Change these
settings to reschedule the event.
2
3
Select Details.
Select the Category pick list and select
Edit Categories.
Location: Provides a description of
where the event takes place.
4
Do one of the following:
Category: Sets the color-coded
category for this event.
• To create a new category, select New
and then enter a category name.
Note
: Provides space for you to
• To add a color to an existing category,
select a category and select Edit.
enter additional text.
Delete: Removes the event from your
calendar.
5
6
7
Select the color you want to give this
category, and then select OK.
(Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add
or edit more categories.
4
Select OK.
TIP To save memory, you can purge your old
events. Open the Record menu and select
Purge. Select the Delete events older than
pick list and select a time frame. Select OK.
Select OK two more times.
Now that the categories are set up with
colors, you can assign categories to your
events to color-code them. See the next
section for details.
C A L E N D A R
193
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
9
Customizing display options for your
calendar
1
2
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select
Display Options.
3
4
Select the Default View pick list and
select the view you want to see when
you open Calendar.
Select Agenda and set any of the
following options:
5
Select Day and set any of the following
options:
Show Due Tasks: The tasks that are
due today and the tasks that are
overdue appear in Agenda View.
Show Category List: The Category pick
list appears in Day View.
Show Time Bars: The time bars appear
in Day View to show the duration of an
event and to illustrate event conflicts.
Show Messages: The number of read
and unread email messages is displayed
in Agenda View.
Compress Day View: When this box is
unchecked, all time slots appear on the
screen. When this box is checked, start
and end times appear for each event,
but blank time slots near the bottom of
the screen disappear to minimize
scrolling.
Background: A favorite photo becomes
the Agenda View background. Check
the Background box, select the image
placeholder, and then select a photo.
Adjust the fade setting so that the text
is easy to read against the photo.
Show Category Column: The
color-coded category marker appears
between the time and the description to
C A L E N D A R
194
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
9
indicate under which category the event
is filed.
7
Select OK.
TIP You can customize your Centro to display
the most current Calendar event in the Main
tab in the Phone application. Press Phone,
open the Options menu, and then select
Phone Display Options. Check the Show
Calendar event box.
6
Select Month and set any of the
following options:
Show Category List: The Category pick
list appears in Month View.
Timed Events: The events that are
scheduled for a specific time appear in
Month View.
Selecting alarm tones
1
2
Press Menu
.
Untimed Events: The events that are
scheduled for a specific date but not a
specific time appear in Month View.
Select Options, and then select Sound
Preferences.
3
4
Select the Application pick list and
select Calendar.
Daily Repeating Events: The events
that repeat every day appear in Month
View.
Select the Volume pick list and select
the volume level.
C A L E N D A R
195
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
9
5
6
Select the Vibrate pick list and select
when you want your Centro to vibrate
for an event alarm.
TIP You can also record sounds and use them
as alarms. Select Manage on the Sound &
Alerts Preferences screen.
Select tones from any of the following
pick lists:
•
•
To record a sound, select New.
To play a sound, select it and press Center
Alarm Sound: The tone that plays the
first time your alarm goes off.
on the 5-way.
•
•
To delete a sound, select it and press
Backspace.
Reminder Sound: The tone that plays if
an alarm is not acknowledged and
the alarm repeats itself.
To send a sound, select it and then select
Send.
DID YOU KNOW
?
Your Centro includes a silent
Repeat: The number of times the alarm
repeats itself if the alarm is not
acknowledged.
alarm that can vibrate even when the Ringer
switch is set to Sound Off.
Default Alarm: A default amount of
time before the event for which the
alarm goes off.
World Clock
World Clock displays the day and time in
three cities anywhere around the globe.
Whether you’re traveling or staying home,
it’s easy to keep track of the best time to
reach your business associates, friends,
and family in faraway places.
7
Select Done.
W O R L D C L O C K
196
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
9
Selecting cities
World Clock shows the system date and
time above the world map. If you selected
the option to get the date and time from
the mobile network (see Setting the date
and time), the AT&T network automatically
updates the time display to match the local
time when you travel.
TIP If you did not select the option to get the
date and time from the mobile network, you
can set the city at the top of the screen to a
fixed location.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can run your stylus over
the map to see the time in other cities. The
shadow over the map represents nighttime
moving across the globe.
TIP World Clock does not automatically update
the system time for daylight-saving time. To
change the Daylight Savings Time setting, see
Below the world map, you can view the
time in two other cities.
TIP If you travel a lot, you may want to select
your home city as one of these two cities, so
that you always know what time it is at home.
Adding cities
If the city you want to display is not in the
predefined list, you can add it.
1
2
Press Applications
World Clock
and select
.
1
Select a City pick list and select Edit
List.
Select a City pick list, and select a city
in the same time zone.
2
3
Select Add.
Select a location in the same time zone
as the city you want to add, and then
select OK.
W O R L D C L O C K
197
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
9
4
5
Enter the name of the city.
Tasks
Select Location, select Map, select the
location of the city, and then select OK.
You can use Tasks to remind you of tasks
you need to complete and to keep a record
of when you finish tasks.
6
7
If the city is not on daylight-saving time,
uncheck this box. If daylight-saving time
is observed, enter Start and End dates.
Select OK, and then select Done.
Adding a task
1
Press Applications
Tasks
and select
Setting an alarm
.
The next time you travel, don’t rely on a
hotel alarm clock to get you to that
important meeting. Use your Centro
instead. World Clock includes a built-in
alarm feature that you can use as a travel
alarm.
2
Select New to create a new task.
1
2
Select Off in the upper-right corner.
Select the time you want the alarm to
sound.
3
Select OK.
3
Enter a description of the task. The text
can be longer than one line.
TIP To customize the alarm sound and volume,
open the Options menu and select Alarm
Preferences.
Setting task priority, due date, and other
details
TIP Make sure the Ringer switch is set to
Sound On, so that you can hear the alarm.
The Details dialog box enables you to
assign a priority level, due date, category,
privacy flag, and other details for each task.
T A S K S
198
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
9
1
Select the task to which you want to
assign details.
repeating task, the next instance of this
task automatically appears in your task
list.
2
3
Select Details.
Set any of the following:
Private: Check this box to mark this
task private. See Working with private
entries for additional information.
Priority: Select the priority number for
this task (1 is the most important). Later
you can arrange your tasks based on the
importance of each task.
: Select this button to enter
additional text that you want to
associate with the task.
TIP You can also select the priority from the
Tasks list by selecting the number next to a
task and then selecting a priority level.
Category: Assign the task to a specific
category.
Due Date: Select the Due Date pick list
and select a due date for the task.
4
Select OK.
TIP If you turn on the Show Due Dates option
in the Tasks Preferences screen, you can
select the due date in the Tasks list to set a
new date.
TIP Press Menu to access other features such
as importing phone numbers into the Tasks
list.
Checking off a task
Alarm: Set an alarm for this task.
1
2
Select the task you want to check off.
Repeat: Indicate whether the task
occurs at regular intervals and how
often it repeats. When you check off a
Press Center
or tap in the box to
check off the task.
T A S K S
199
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
9
Organizing your tasks
In the Tasks list, select one of these
options:
All: Displays all your tasks.
Date: Displays tasks that are due in a
specific time frame. With Date selected,
press Down
then press Center
to select the pick list, and
to see the various
options: Due Today, Last 7 Days, Next 7
Days, or Past Due.
TIP If you accidentally check off a task and
need to uncheck it, highlight the task again
and press Center on the 5-way to uncheck it.
Category: Displays tasks that are assigned
to the selected category. Select the
Category pick list to select a different
category.
TIP You can set Tasks to record the date that
you completed a task, and you can select to
show or hide completed tasks. Completed
tasks remain in the memory of your Centro
until you purge them.
DID YOU KNOW
?
Overdue tasks have an
exclamation point (!) next to the due date.
T A S K S
200
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
9
Deleting a task
2
3
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
1
2
3
Select the task you want to delete.
Press Menu
Set any of the following preferences:
.
Sort by: Indicates the order in which
your tasks appear in the list.
Select Delete Task from the Record
menu.
4
Select OK.
Show Completed Tasks: Displays
tasks you’ve checked off.
TIP To save memory, you can purge all
completed tasks. Open the Record menu and
select Purge. Select OK.
Record Completion Date: Replaces
the due date with the completion date
when you complete (check off) the task.
Customizing Tasks
Show Due Dates: Displays task due
dates and inserts an exclamation point
(!) next to overdue tasks.
The Tasks Preferences screen enables you
to control the appearance of the Tasks list
screen.
Show Priorities: Displays the priority
setting for each task.
1
In the Tasks list screen, press
Menu
.
Show Categories: Displays the
category for each task.
Alarm Sound: Sets the sound for the
alarms you assign to your tasks.
4
Select OK.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can display your tasks in
your calendar. See Customizing display
options for your calendar for details.
T A S K S
201
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R
9
T A S K S
202
CHAPTER
10
Your memos and documents
With its ability to store large amounts of important information,
your Palm® Centro™ smart device lets you take your office with
you—including your Microsoft Office and PDF files. You can
keep updated copies of the files on both your Centro and your
computer so that you can work on them in the most convenient
location any time.
Leave your note pad and voice recorder at home. Use Memos to
type notes. Use Voice Memo to record notes, agenda items, and
other important thoughts, and play them back, right on your
Centro. You can even send your notes and voice memos to a
friend or colleague by attaching them to an email or multimedia
message.
Benefits
•
Manage Word, Excel®, PowerPoint,
and PDF files on your Centro
•
Capture thoughts on the fly
•
Improve productivity by taking
important docs, spreadsheets, and
presentations with you
203
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S
10
Documents To Go®
Professional
an upgrade that supports Office 2007, go to
dataviz.com/office2007 (additional fees
may apply).
If you install the Documents To Go desktop
software (from the Getting Started CD),
you can use Documents To Go to transfer
files from your computer to your Centro
when you synchronize.
NOTE The Getting Started CD includes a
link to the Documents To Go® desktop
software. On your Centro, the companion
for Documents To Go is named Documents
and it’s already installed on your Centro.
Here are a few more examples of what you
can do with Documents:
With the Documents application, you can
take your important office info with you.
You can carry, create, view, and edit
Microsoft Word and Excel files directly on
your Centro. You can also view, carry, and
manage PowerPoint and PDF files. For
example, you can open email attachments,
files you download with the web browser,
and files stored on an expansion card—as
long as the files are in a supported format.
•
Send and receive email attachments in
Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Acrobat
file formats (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).
•
•
View Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and
Acrobat files (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).
Create or edit a Word-compatible
document or Excel-compatible
spreadsheet on your Centro, and then
save it in the native DOC or XLS format.
NOTE The version of Documents To Go
that comes with your Centro supports
viewing of Microsoft Office 2007
documents. To edit Office 2007 files on
your Centro, you must save the files in
Office 2003 format. For information about
•
Create a PowerPoint presentation on
your computer, use the Documents To
Go desktop application to optimize the
file for your Centro, and then sync the
file onto your Centro to view it on the
go.
D O C U M E N T S T O G O ® P R O F E S S I O N A L
205
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S
10
NOTE The Documents application does
not support some editing functions, such
as multiple font sizes and spell checking.
TIP For more info on the Documents
If you installed the desktop application from
the Getting Started CD, you can also click the
Documents To Go icon on your computer,
and then click Help.
2
Select the document you want from the
list.
TIP Install the Files application from the
Getting Started CD to easily browse and
manage files on an expansion card.
TIP When you work on a file on your Centro,
you can save it to your Centro or to an
expansion card. Open the File menu, select
Save As, and then select the location where
you want to save the file.
Opening a document
In the Documents application, you can
view and open any Word, Excel,
PowerPoint, or Acrobat (PDF) file on your
Centro or on an expansion card that is
inserted into the expansion slot.
Memos
1
Press Applications
Documents
and select
Memos are a great way to store notes on
your Centro.
.
DID YOU KNOW
?
Each memo can include 4,096
characters of text.
M E M O S
206
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S
10
Creating a memo
Voice Memo
1
2
3
Press Applications
Memos
and select
.
Voice Memo provides a place for you to
record and play back notes and other
important thoughts directly on your Centro.
Enter the text you want to appear in the
memo.
Select Done.
Creating a voice memo
When recording a voice memo, hold your
Centro with the screen facing you while
you’re speaking.
1
2
3
Press Applications
Voice Memo
Select and begin speaking to record
and select
.
your memo.
When you are finished recording, select
.
TIP You can assign categories to your memos.
Open the memo you want to change, select
the category pick list at the top of the screen,
and select a category.
The memo is automatically saved to
your Centro.
4
(Optional) Press Menu
and select
Rename Memo from the Voice Memo
menu. Enter a title for the memo.
Deleting a memo
1
2
3
Open the memo you want to delete.
Press Menu
.
TIP If you are not using Push to Talk, you can
reassign the Side button to start recording in
Voice Memo. See Reassigning buttons.
Select Delete Memo from the Record
menu.
4
Select OK.
V O I C E M E M O
207
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S
10
TIP If you need to pause while recording,
press and hold Center on the 5-way. Release
the button to resume recording.
TIP To adjust the volume level, press the
Volume button on the side of your Centro.
TIP To change a voice memo title, open the
Voice Memo menu and select Rename
Memo.
DID YOU KNOW You can use a voice memo as
?
a ringtone. Highlight the voice memo in the
list, open the Voice Memo menu, and then
select Copy to Ringtone.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can send a voice memo in
an email or MMS message (see the
documentation for your email application, or
You can also use Bluetooth® wireless
technology to send a voice memo to a nearby
Bluetooth device (see Sending info over a
Listening to a voice memo
1
Press Applications
Voice Memo
and select
.
2
In the Voice Memo list, navigate to the
voice memo title and then press
Center
to select it. The voice memo
begins to play.
3
Press Center
to pause or stop
playback.
V O I C E M E M O
208
CHAPTER
11
Your application and
info management tools
Synchronization is a great way to transfer, update, and back up
info on your Palm® Centro™ smart device. Synchronizing simply
means that info you entered or updated in one place (your
Centro or your computer) is automatically updated in the other.
There’s no need to enter info twice.
Expansion cards (sold separately) provide a compact and
limitless storage solution. When one card becomes full, simply
use another card to carry your extra music and video clips and
to install and run games and other software, from dictionaries
to travel guides.
Benefits
•
Locate info in your applications
with the Find feature
•
•
Quickly enter, update, and protect
your info on your computer and
your Centro
•
Install applications, games, and
other software
Store, carry, and exchange info
209
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
Using Find
The Find feature locates any text in the
built-in applications and databases and
in some third-party applications. The Find
feature searches for the group of
characters you specify, including characters
that are part of a word. Find is not
case-sensitive.
Viewing and using
the alerts
DID YOU KNOW Find locates any word that
?
begins with the text you enter. For example,
entering “plane” finds “planet” but not
“airplane.”
The Alert dialog box on your Centro shows
info about incoming items, such as new
messages and Calendar events. An alert
also notifies you when you miss a phone
call.
1
Press Option , and then press Shift/
Find
to open the Find dialog box.
2
3
4
Enter the text you want to find.
Select OK to start the search.
To view the Alert dialog box, tap the
In the search results, select the text you
want to review, or select Find More to
continue the search.
blinking bell
with your stylus when it
appears in the upper-left corner of any
screen, or press and hold Center
when
the blinking bell appears.
U S I N G F I N D
211
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
In the Alert dialog box, you can do any of
the following:
2
3
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select
Advanced Mode or Basic Mode.
•
Check the box next to the alert to
remove it from the list.
•
Select the alert to open the
corresponding application and view the
alert item (message, event, missed call,
and so on).
•
•
Select Done to close the Alert dialog
box. The alert remains active and the
bell continues to blink in the upper-left
corner of the screen.
Select Clear All to delete all alerts in
the Alert dialog box.
Calculator
Calculator includes a basic calculator, plus
an advanced calculator with scientific,
financial, and conversion functions.
TIP In Basic Mode, you can also press Right
on the 5-way to switch to Advanced Mode. In
Advanced Mode, press Right on the 5-way to
cycle between functions, and press Left on
the 5-way to return to Basic Mode.
Switching between Basic and Advanced
Calculator Modes
1
Press Applications
Calc
and select
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can tap the onscreen
number pad or use the keyboard to input
numbers.
.
C A L C U L A T O R
212
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
Selecting functions in Advanced
Calculator Mode
Length: Length conversions for metric
and English values.
1
Switch to Advanced Mode (see the
preceding procedure).
Area: Area conversions for metric,
traditional, and English values.
2
3
Press Menu
.
Volume: Volume conversions for metric
and English values.
Select Options, and then select the
type of function you want to use:
4
5
Press Menu
.
Math: Advanced mathematical
functions such as exponents, roots, and
logarithms.
Select Pref, and then select the decimal
display format: Float, Fixed(x), Sci(x),
or Eng(x).
Trig: Trigonometric functions such as
sine, cosine, tangent, and variants.
6
7
Press Menu
.
Select Pref, and then select the number
display format: Degrees, Radians, or
Grads.
Finance: Financial calculator functions
such as APR and amortization.
Logic: Hexadecimal characters in
keypad, plus logic functions such as
And, Not, Or, and Xor.
TIP Select Sto to store a number in one of ten
memory slots. Select Rcl to recall a stored
number.
Statistics: Statistical functions such as
sum, factorial, and random number
generator.
TIP Select Con to access a list of
mathematical constants such as Avogadro’s
number or the speed of light.
Weight/Tmp: Weight and temperature
conversions for metric and English
values.
C A L C U L A T O R
213
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
need to download the software to your
Installing applications
computer first. See Installing bonus
software from My Palm on your computer
for info on installing software that includes
a desktop component.
Your Centro comes with several built-in and
ready-to-use applications. You can also
install additional applications, such as
business software, games, and more. The
Getting Started CD includes several bonus
software apps, and you can purchase other
third-party Palm OS® by ACCESS apps as
well. To learn about applications you can
add to your Centro, go to go.palm.com/
1
Press Applications
My Centro
Select the Bonus tab.
and select
.
2
3
Select the Install link below the name
of the application you want to install.
Repeat step 3 to install additional
applications.
NOTE The instructions in this section tell
you how to install basic PRC (Palm OS
application) and PDB (Palm OS database)
files on your Centro. Some Palm OS
software uses an installer or wizard to
guide you through the process. For details,
consult the documentation that came with
the software.
Installing applications from the Internet
You can use the web browser on your
Centro to install Palm OS files (PRC or
PDB) directly from the Internet. When you
download a PRC or PDB file, it is
automatically installed on your Centro. If a
file is compressed (for example, as a ZIP or
SIT file), you need to download it to your
computer, expand the file, and then
synchronize to transfer the expanded file to
your Centro.
Installing bonus software from My Centro
on your device
My Centro lets you download and install
software that you can use on your Centro.
If the software has a desktop component
in addition to a Centro component, you
NOTE Make sure the application you
download is compatible with your device.
I N S T A L L I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S
214
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
1
2
3
Open the web browser (see Viewing a
web page).
Installing other third-party applications
from a computer
Go to the page that contains the link to
the application you want to download.
When you download an application to your
computer, it is probably in a compressed
format such as a ZIP or SIT file. If the file is
compressed, you need to use a
decompression utility on your computer,
such as WinZip or Allume Stuffit Expander,
before you install the application on your
Centro.
Press Left or Right to highlight the
link to the file, and then press
Center
to initiate the download
process.
4
Follow the onscreen instructions to
accept and install the application.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To install an app
from your computer to your Centro,
you must first install Palm® Desktop
software on your computer (see Installing
Installing bonus software from My Palm
on your computer
1
On your computer, go to go.palm.com/
2
Follow the onscreen instructions to
download the application(s) you want to
install.
1
Windows: Select Start > Programs >
Palm > Install Tool, and then select
Add to browse to the application you
want to add.
3
4
When prompted to select either Save or
Run, select Run to place the
application(s) in the install queue.
Mac: Drag and drop the file(s) onto the
Send To Device droplet in the Palm
folder.
Synchronize your Centro with your
computer to install the application(s) on
your Centro.
I N S T A L L I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S
215
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
2
3
Select your device name from the User Mac:
list, and then click OK.
1
In the menu for Palm Desktop software,
click HotSync.
Synchronize your Centro with your
computer to install the application(s) on
your Centro.
2
Select Install Handheld files, and then
select expansion card as the file’s
destination.
Installing third-party applications from a
computer to an expansion card
Getting help with third-party applications
You can install an application to an
expansion card rather than to your Centro.
If you encounter a problem (such as an
error message) with a third-party
application, contact the application’s author
or vendor. For general troubleshooting of
third-party applications, see Third-party
Windows:
1
2
3
4
Select Start > Programs > Palm >
Install Tool.
Select your device name from the User
list.
Select Add and browse to the
application you want to add.
Removing
applications
Select Change Destination and select
the expansion card.
5
6
Select OK.
If you decide that you no longer need an
application, or you want to free up
memory, you can remove apps from your
Centro or an expansion card (for more on
expansion cards, see Inserting an
Synchronize your Centro with your
computer to install the application(s) on
your Centro.
apps, patches, and extensions that you
R E M O V I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S
216
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
install; you cannot remove the built-in apps
that reside in the ROM portion of your
Centro.
8
Synchronize to remove the application
from the Backup subfolder on your
computer.
Manually deleting applications
DID YOU KNOW Some applications are factory
?
installed on your Centro and cannot be
deleted. These are listed with a Lock icon next
to them.
If an app you delete reappears on your
Centro, you may need to manually delete
the app from your computer.
DID YOU KNOW
?
Applications deleted from your
1
Locate your Backup subfolder on your
Centro are kept on your computer in the
Archive folder of your user folder. If you have
trouble locating your user folder, see I can’t
computer.
Windows: C:\Program
Files\Palm\<device name>.
Mac: Mac
HD\Applications\Palm\Users\<device
name>.
1
2
Press Applications
.
If you want to remove an application
from an expansion card, insert the card
into your Centro.
If you upgraded from a previous version
of Palm Desktop, your Backup subfolder
may be located in the palmOne or
Handspring folder.
3
4
5
Press Menu
.
Select Delete on the App menu.
Select the Delete From pick list and
select the location of the application you
want to remove: Phone or <card
name>.
2
3
If you find a PRC or PDB file for the
application you just removed, delete the
file from the Backup subfolder.
Delete the file from your device again.
6
7
Select the application that you want to
remove.
Select Delete, and then select Yes to
confirm deletion.
R E M O V I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S
217
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
Size: The size (in kilobytes) of
applications and information on your
Centro.
Viewing application
info
Records: The number of entries in
various applications on your Centro.
The Info screens display basic statistics
about the applications on your Centro.
6
7
Scroll to the application you want to see
info about.
1
2
3
4
Press Applications
Press Menu
.
Select Done.
.
Select Info on the App menu.
Select the Device pick list and select
the location of the app you want to view
info for: Phone or <card name>.
Sending information
with Bluetooth®
wireless technology
5
At the bottom of the screen, select the
type of information you want to view:
The range of Bluetooth® wireless
technology is up to 30 feet in optimum
environmental conditions. Performance
and range may be affected by physical
obstacles, radio interference from nearby
electronic equipment, and other factors.
TIP Check your battery level before
Version: The version numbers of
applications on your Centro.
establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection.
If the battery level is very low, you can’t make
a Bluetooth wireless connection.
V I E W I N G A P P L I C A T I O N I N F O
218
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
Sending info over a Bluetooth wireless
connection
Sending an app over a Bluetooth wireless
connection
In most applications, you can send an
individual entry or item such as a contact or
a picture. You can also send all the entries
in a category, such as all contacts in the
Business category.
1
Press Applications
Bluetooth
and select
.
2
3
4
5
6
Select Bluetooth On.
Press Applications
.
Press Menu
.
1
Press Applications
Bluetooth
and select
Select Send from the App menu.
.
Select the Send From pick list and
select the location of the app you want
to send: Phone or <card name>.
2
3
4
Select Bluetooth On.
Open an application.
Select the entry or category you want to
send. You cannot send an item that has
7
Select the application you want to
transfer. You cannot send an item that
a lock
next to it.
has a lock
next to it.
5
6
7
8
Press Menu
.
8
9
Select Send.
Select Send from the leftmost menu.
Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.
Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.
10 Select the receiving device(s) from the
Discovery Results list, and then select
OK.
Select the receiving device(s) from the
Discovery Results list, and then select
OK.
11 Wait for a message to indicate that the
transfer is complete before you
continue using your Centro.
9
Wait for a message to indicate that the
transfer is complete before you
continue using your Centro.
S E N D I N G I N F O R M A T I O N W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® W I R E L E S S T E C H N O L O G Y
219
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
Receiving info over a Bluetooth wireless
connection
4
Use the other device to discover your
Centro and send information to it:
1
Press Applications
Bluetooth
Select Bluetooth On.
and select
• See the other device’s documentation
to learn how to discover and send
information over a Bluetooth wireless
connection.
.
2
3
Select the Visibility pick list and select
• If the Ringer switch is set to Sound
On, your Centro beeps to notify you of
the connection and then prompts you
to accept the info. Select a category
or expansion card to file the item(s). If
you don’t select a category, the
one of the following:
Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that
are not on your Trusted Devices list to
request a connection with your Centro.
Your Centro remains accessible to other
devices until you turn this option off.
After you’ve finished using this setting,
remember to change it back to Hidden.
item(s) goes into the Unfiled category.
5
Select Ye s to receive the information or
No to refuse it.
Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices
that are not on your Trusted Devices list
to request a connection with your
Centro during the next two minutes.
Your Centro reverts to the Hidden
setting and becomes inaccessible to
other devices after two minutes.
TIP The Device Name in the Bluetooth app is
the name other devices with Bluetooth
wireless technology see when they connect
to your Centro. The default name is the name
you gave your device during setup. You can
change this name if you want to.
DID YOU KNOW
?
When you receive an
application over a Bluetooth connection, you
can store the application on your Centro or
send it to an expansion card inserted into the
expansion card slot.
S E N D I N G I N F O R M A T I O N W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® W I R E L E S S T E C H N O L O G Y
220
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
1
2
Open the application that holds the
entry you want to beam.
Beaming information
Select the entry or category you want to
beam. You cannot beam an item that
Your Centro is equipped with an IR
(infrared) port so that you can beam
information to another device with an IR
port—provided the other device supports
IR communications with Palm OS devices.
The IR port is located on the side of your
Centro, next to the expansion card slot,
behind the small dark shield.
has a lock
icon next to it.
3
4
Press Menu
.
Select Record, and then select one of
the following:
Beam: Sends an individual record.
Beam Category: Sends all entries in
the current category.
TIP For best results, the path between the
two devices must be clear of obstacles, and
both devices must be stationary. If you have
difficulty beaming, shorten the distance and
avoid bright sunlight.
DID YOU KNOW
?
If you beam a bookmark or
saved page from the web browser, it beams
the URL, not the contents of that page.
5
6
When the Beam Status dialog box
appears, point the IR port on your
Centro directly at the IR port of the
receiving device.
Beaming an entry
You can beam an individual entry or item
such as a contact or a picture. You can also
beam all the entries in the selected
category, such as all the contacts in the
Business or Family category.
Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to
indicate that the transfer is complete
before you continue using your Centro.
TIP Once you set up your business card, you
can beam it in two key presses: From the
Main tab in the Phone application, press
Menu, and then press M.
B E A M I N G I N F O R M A T I O N
221
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
Centro directly at the IR port of the
receiving device.
8
Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to
indicate that the transfer is complete
before you continue using your Centro.
Receiving beamed information
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure that the
Beam Receive option in Power
power settings for details.
Beaming an application
Not all applications can be beamed. A lock
icon appears on the Beam screen next
to applications that cannot be beamed.
1
2
Turn on your screen.
Select the beam command on the
transmitting device.
1
2
3
4
Press Applications
Press Menu
.
3
Point the IR port on your Centro directly
at the IR port of the transmitting device
to open the Beam Status dialog box.
.
Select Beam from the App menu.
Select the Beam From pick list and
select the location of the application you
want to beam: Phone or <card name>.
4
5
When the Beam Status dialog box
appears, select a category for the entry.
Select Ye s to receive the information or
No to refuse it.
5
Select the application you want to
transfer.
6
7
Select Beam.
When the Beam Status dialog box
appears, point the IR port on your
B E A M I N G I N F O R M A T I O N
222
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
synchronization, you can turn off
synchronization for Memos.
TIP If you do not select a category when you
receive a beamed item, the item is placed in
the Unfiled category.
TIP Windows If you set up your Centro to
sync with Outlook, you can learn how to
change which applications synchronize and
change their synchronization settings by doing
the following: Click the HotSync manager
icon in the taskbar and select Custom. Select
a conduit that syncs with Outlook, click
Change, and then click Help.
TIP If you can’t receive beamed info, make
sure that you are not running a third-party app
that disables beaming. If you still can’t receive
a beam, try a soft reset (see Resetting your
Centro).
DID YOU KNOW You can store a beamed app
?
on your Centro or send it to an expansion card
inserted into the expansion card slot.
WINDOWS ONLY
1
Click HotSync® manager
taskbar in the lower-right corner of your
screen.
in the
Synchronizing
information—
advanced
2
3
Select Custom.
Select your device name from the User
list at the top of the screen.
Changing which applications sync
4
5
Select the application for which you
want to turn synchronization on or off,
and then click Change.
By default, information from Calendar,
Contacts, Memos, Pictures & Videos, and
Tasks is updated each time you
synchronize your Centro. You can change
which applications synchronize. For
example, if you don’t use the Memos
application and you want to speed up
Select Synchronize the files to turn on
synchronization for an app.
Select Do nothing to turn off
synchronization for an app that currently
synchronizes (for example, to turn off
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D
223
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
synchronization for Memos if you do not
use this app).
6
(Optional) If you want to make this
change permanent, check the Set as
default box. Otherwise, your change
affects only one synchronization (the
next one you do); thereafter, the
synchronization action reverts to what it
was before the change.
7
8
Click OK.
(Optional) To turn synchronization on or
off for other apps, repeat steps 4, 5, 6,
and 7 for each application you want to
change.
9
Click Done.
NOTE If you want the information in one
location (on your Centro or on your
MAC ONLY
computer) to completely replace the
information in the other location for that
app, select one of the two overwrite
options. For example, if the Calendar info
on your Centro is accurate but the info on
your computer has become corrupted,
select Handheld overwrites Desktop for
the Calendar app to have your Centro info
replace your computer info. Note that
“handheld” refers to your Centro and
“desktop” refers to your computer.
1
2
3
4
Double-click the Palm Desktop
in the Palm folder.
icon
From the HotSync menu, select
Conduit Settings.
From the User pop-up menu, select
your device name.
Select the application for which you
want to turn synchronization on or off,
and then click Conduit Settings.
5
Select Synchronize the files to turn on
synchronization for an app.
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D
224
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
Select Do nothing to turn off
synchronization for an app that currently
synchronizes (for example, to turn off
synchronization for Memos if you do not
use this app).
6
(Optional) If you want to make this
change permanent, click Make Default.
Otherwise, your change affects only
one synchronization (the next one you
do); thereafter, the synchronization
action reverts to what it was before the
change.
7
8
Click OK.
(Optional) To turn synchronization on or
off for other apps, repeat steps 4, 5, 6,
and 7 for each application you want to
change.
9
Close the Conduit Settings window.
Setting up a Bluetooth connection for
synchronization
NOTE If you want the information in one
location (Centro or computer) to
If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth
wireless technology, you can synchronize
wirelessly over a Bluetooth connection.
completely replace the information in the
other location for that app, select one of
the two overwrite options. For example, if
the Calendar info on your Centro is
accurate but the info on your Mac has
become corrupted, select Handheld
overwrites Macintosh for the Calendar
app to have your Centro info replace the
info on your Mac. Note that “handheld”
refers to your Centro.
1
Press Applications
Bluetooth
Select Bluetooth On.
and select
.
2
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D
225
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
TIP After you form a partnership with a device,
you can change the Visibility setting back to
Hidden. That way only devices with which
you’ve already formed a partnership can find
your Centro. New devices cannot request a
connection.
5
6
Select Setup Devices.
Select HotSync Setup.
3
(Optional) Enter a device name that
identifies your Centro when it is
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.
TIP The device name you enter is the name
other devices with Bluetooth wireless
technology see when they connect to your
Centro. The default name is the name you
gave your device during setup. You can
change this name if you want to.
7
Follow the onscreen instructions to
create a partnership between your
Centro and your computer. In some
cases you may need to perform setup
steps on your computer before you can
complete this step. Check your
computer’s documentation for specific
setup instructions.
NOTE Use the same device name for all
your Bluetooth connections. If you change
the device name, you need to re-create any
partnerships you have already created.
4
Select the Visibility pick list and select
Visible or Temporary.
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D
226
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
8
After you finish the HotSync setup,
select Done to return to Applications
View.
9
Press Applications
HotSync
and select
.
You’re now ready to sync your Centro with
your Bluetooth computer.
Synchronizing over a Bluetooth
connection
When you synchronize using the Bluetooth
wireless feature on your Centro, you don’t
need your sync cable. This is especially
useful if you travel with a laptop enabled
with Bluetooth wireless technology.
10 Select Local.
11 Select the pick list below the HotSync
icon, and then select the name of the
PC you set up for Bluetooth
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Verify the following
on your computer:
•
It includes built-in Bluetooth wireless
technology or a Bluetooth adapter.
•
•
Bluetooth is turned on.
12 Select the HotSync
icon on your
HotSync manager is active. On a
Centro.
Windows computer, you know HotSync
manager is active when its icon appears
in the lower-right corner of your screen.
When synchronization is complete, a
message appears at the top of your Centro
screen. Be patient; synchronization may
take a few minutes.
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D
227
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
Synchronizing over an infrared
connection
When you synchronize using the IR port on
your Centro, you don’t need your sync
cable. This is especially useful if you travel
with an IR-enabled laptop.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Verify the following
on your computer:
•
It has an enabled IR port or an IR device
attached to it. Check your computer’s
documentation to see if it supports IR
communication.
2
On your Centro, press
Applications and select
HotSync
.
3
4
Select Local.
•
HotSync manager is active. On a
Select the pick list below the HotSync
icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld.
Windows computer, you know HotSync
manager is active when its icon appears
in the lower-right corner of your screen.
5
6
Position the IR port on your Centro
within a few inches of your computer’s
IR port.
WINDOWS ONLY
On your computer, click HotSync
manager in the taskbar in the
Select the HotSync
Centro.
icon on your
1
lower-right corner of your screen. Make
sure that Infrared is selected.
When synchronization is complete, a
message appears at the top of your Centro
screen. Be patient; synchronization may
take a few minutes.
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D
228
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
MAC ONLY
Using expansion
cards
1
2
3
4
5
Double-click the HotSync manager
icon in the Palm folder.
Click the HotSync Controls tab, and
then select Enabled.
The expansion card slot on your Centro
enables you to add microSD cards to
extend the storage capacity of your Centro
(expansion cards sold separately). Here are
some examples of what microSD
expansion cards can store:
Click the Connection Settings tab, and
then check the On box next to IR port.
Close the HotSync Software Setup
window.
On your Centro, press
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Photos
Applications
HotSync
and select
.
MP3 audio files
Email attachments
Games
6
7
Select Local.
Select the pick list below the HotSync
icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld.
eBooks
8
9
Position the IR port on your Centro
within a few inches of your Mac’s IR
port.
Microsoft Office files
Adobe Acrobat files
Applications
Databases
Select the HotSync
icon on your
Centro.
When synchronization is complete, a
message appears at the top of your Centro
screen. Be patient; synchronization may
take a few minutes.
Inserting an expansion card
1
2
3
Remove the battery door.
Open the expansion slot door.
Hold your Centro with the screen facing
you, and hold the card with the label
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S
229
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
facing you. The notch on the card should
be in the lower corner.
3
4
Press the card into the expansion slot to
release it from the expansion slot.
After you feel the expansion card slot
eject the card, remove the card
from the slot.
5
6
Close the expansion slot door.
Replace the battery door.
Opening applications on an expansion
card
4
Insert the card into the expansion card
slot until you feel it lock into place.
After you insert an expansion card into the
expansion card slot, you can open any of
the applications stored on the expansion
card.
TIP The expansion card slot has a push-push
mechanism: push in gently to insert a card;
push in gently to remove it.
1
Insert the expansion card into the
expansion card slot. The Card category
of Applications View automatically
appears.
TIP If the Ringer switch is set to Sound On,
you hear a confirmation tone when you insert
or remove an expansion card.
5
6
Close the expansion slot door.
Replace the battery door.
Removing an expansion card
1
2
Remove the battery door.
Open the expansion slot door.
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S
230
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
2
3
Select the icon for the application you
want to open.
Copying applications between an
expansion card and your Centro
Press Center
to open the
You can copy applications from your Centro
to your expansion card and vice versa.
application.
TIP Install the Files application from the
Getting Started CD to easily browse and
manage files on an expansion card.
TIP Before you copy an application to an
expansion card, make sure that it is
compatible with Palm OS software version
5.4.5 or later. Some applications do not work
with expansion cards and do not allow you to
store files in a location that is separate from
the application.
Accessing items stored on an expansion
card
When an expansion card contains items
such as pictures or songs, you can’t view
them directly from the Card category in
Applications View. You must open the app
that recognizes the item.
1
Press Applications
.
1
Insert the expansion card into the
expansion card slot. The Card category
of Applications View automatically
appears.
2
3
Select the category pick list in the title
bar, and select All.
Select the icon for the application in
which you want to open the item. For
example, to view a picture, select
Pics&Videos.
2
3
4
Press Menu
.
Select Copy from the App menu.
Select the Copy To pick list and select
the destination: Phone or <card
name>.
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S
231
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
5
Select the From pick list and select the
location of the application you want to
copy: Phone or <card name>.
Renaming an expansion card
If you change the contents of an expansion
card, you may at some point want to
rename the card to better match its
contents.
6
7
Highlight the application you want to
copy.
Select Copy.
1
Insert the expansion card into the
expansion card slot.
Viewing expansion card information
2
Select the category pick list at the top
of the screen and select All.
3
4
5
Select Card Info
.
Press Menu
.
Select Rename Card from the Card
menu.
6
7
Enter a new name for the card.
Select OK.
The Card Info application displays general
information about the expansion card that
is currently in the expansion slot, and it
enables you to rename and format a card.
TIP If you have trouble copying info to,
renaming, or formatting an expansion card,
make sure the card is not write-protected.
Press Applications and select Card Info. If a
“This card is read-only” message appears, the
card is write-protected. See the instructions
that came with your card for additional info.
•
Press Applications
Card Info
and select
.
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S
232
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
Formatting an expansion card
1
2
Insert the expansion card into the
expansion card slot.
Formatting an expansion card is similar to
formatting a disk on a computer. When
you format an expansion card, you erase all
the information stored on the card.
Select the category pick list at the top
of the screen and select All.
3
4
5
Select Card Info
.
Press Menu
.
TIP If you format a card, any photos or
Select Format Card from the Card
menu.
documents that were previously stored on the
card are deleted from your desktop software
the next time you sync. You can recover these
files from the backup folder, or you can
prevent the deletion by temporarily changing
your sync settings for the affected application
to Desktop overwrites handheld.
6
7
Enter a new name for the card.
Select OK.
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S
233
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S
11
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S
234
CHAPTER
12
Your personal settings
Customizing your Palm® Centro™ smart device is a great way to
make it match your lifestyle and work even harder for you.
On your Centro, you can easily customize the sounds, fonts,
screen colors, and more. Take advantage of different levels of
security. Prevent making an accidental (and expensive) phone
call by locking the keyboard. Some settings can help extend the
life of your Centro battery. There are lots of ways to make your
Centro work better for you.
Benefits
•
Access applications quickly
•
•
Conserve power
•
Make your screen easy to read
Enjoy your Centro more
235
In this chapter
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
12
Sliding the Ringer switch back to Sound On
restores the previous sound settings.
System sound
settings
Silencing sounds
You can immediately silence all alerts,
ringtones, music that plays through the
built-in speaker, and system sounds by
sliding the Ringer switch to Sound Off. This
does not mute the audio during a phone
call.
Sound Off
Sound On
Setting system volume levels
1
Slide the Ringer switch to Sound Off
. Your Centro vibrates once to let you
know that you’ve turned sounds off.
You can set the volume level for system
sounds, such as the tone that plays when
you synchronize.
2
To hear all sounds again, slide the
Ringer switch to Sound On
.
TIP If the Ringer switch is set to Sound Off,
the ringer setting overrides the sound settings
and all sounds are turned off.
If you have set up Push to Talk, your PTT
availability status is affected by the Ringer
switch setting. When the Ringer switch is
set to Sound Off, your availability is set to
Silent.
1
2
Press Applications
Sounds
and select
.
NOTE For info on setting the vibrate
option, see the section on setting alert
tones in the chapters that describe the
individual applications.
Select the Application pick list and
select System.
S Y S T E M S O U N D S E T T I N G S
237
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
12
3
Select the System Volume and Game
Volume pick lists and select the volume
levels.
Backlight
2
3
Press Left and Right to adjust the
brightness.
Select Done.
TIP To temporarily set the backlight to the
preset low setting, press Option + Menu.
TIP You can also adjust the backlight and set
the brightness duration during a call in Power
4
Select Done.
Changing the screen font
Display and
You can change the screen font in
Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Messaging,
Tasks, and Web. The font styles may vary
between applications, and some
appearance settings
Adjusting the brightness
applications may offer fewer choices.
Depending on the lighting conditions in
which you’re using your Centro, you may
need to adjust the brightness of the
screen.
1
Open the application in which you want
to change the font.
2
3
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Font.
1
Press Option , and then press
Backlight
.
D I S P L A Y A N D A P P E A R A N C E S E T T I N G S
238
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
12
4
Select a font style. (In the web browser,
select the Font size pick list and select
Large or Small.)
3 Set any of the following preferences:
Preset to: The standard number
conventions for your country. When you
select a country, the other Formats
Preferences are automatically set to
that country’s conventions. You can also
edit each option individually.
Small font
Large bold font
Large font
Small bold font
5
Select OK.
Setting display formats
Formats Preferences enable you to select
number conventions based on geographic
regions. For example, in the United
Kingdom, time often is expressed using a
24-hour clock. In the United States, time is
expressed using a 12-hour clock with an
AM or a PM suffix. Many of the built-in
applications on your Centro use the
Formats Preferences settings.
Time: The time format. Select HH:MM
to display a 24-hour clock.
Date: The date format.
Week starts: The first day of the week
(usually Sunday or Monday).
Numbers: The format for numbers with
decimal points and commas.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Formats.
and select
.
4
Select Done.
2
D I S P L A Y A N D A P P E A R A N C E S E T T I N G S
239
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
12
Aligning the screen to correct tapping
problems
Changing the system color scheme
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Color Theme.
and select
Occasionally, the Centro touchscreen
alignment may need to be readjusted. If
this problem occurs, you may see the
wrong feature being activated when you
tap the screen. To fix the problem, you can
align the screen at any time.
.
2
3
Select a color scheme from the list.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Touchscreen.
and select
.
2
3
Follow the onscreen instructions and
tap the screen where indicated.
4
Select Done.
TIP You can also set the wallpaper for the
Main tab in the Phone application (see
application) and the background for Calendar
Agenda View (see Customizing display
4
Select Done.
D I S P L A Y A N D A P P E A R A N C E S E T T I N G S
240
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
12
Applications settings
TIP To create a new category, select the
category pick list and select Edit Categories.
Select New, and then enter the category
name. Select OK to close the dialog box, and
then select OK.
You can change the Applications settings
on your Centro so that you can easily
access the applications you use most
often. You can arrange and display your
applications by category, reassign
DID YOU KNOW
?
If there is an expansion card in
the expansion slot, the card appears in the
category pick list and is treated as a category
when you press Applications repeatedly.
the buttons on your Centro, and select
default applications for specific tasks.
Displaying applications by category
Arranging applications by category
Do one of the following:
You can assign an application to a category
and then display a specific category of
applications in Applications View.
•
Press Applications
repeatedly to
cycle through the categories.
•
Select the category pick list at the top
of the screen and select a category.
Select All to display all your
applications.
1
2
3
4
Press Applications
Press Menu
.
.
Select Category on the App menu.
Select the pick list next to each
application and select a category.
Changing Applications View
By default, Applications View displays each
application as an icon. As an alternative,
you can view a list of applications. The list
view is particularly useful when you have
so many applications in a category that the
applications fill up more than one screen.
5
Select Done.
A P P L I C A T I O N S S E T T I N G S
241
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
12
1
2
3
Press Applications
Press Menu
.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Buttons.
and select
.
.
2
3
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
Select the pick list next to the item you
want to reassign, and then select an
application.
4
5
Select the View By pick list and select
List.
Select OK.
Reassigning buttons
With Buttons Preferences, you can select
which applications are associated with the
quick buttons and the Side button on your
Centro. You can assign a primary and
secondary application to each of the three
quick buttons that open an application.
4
Select Done.
NOTE We recommend that you keep the
primary button assignments on the factory
settings until you become comfortable with
the features of your Centro. If you do
change the primary button assignments,
remember that the instructions in this
guide and in the other help features refer to
the original button settings.
DID YOU KNOW
?
You can also choose an
application to open with the sync button on
the USB sync cable. To change this setting,
select HotSync on the Buttons Preferences
screen.
TIP To restore all the buttons and key
combinations to their factory settings, select
Default.
A P P L I C A T I O N S S E T T I N G S
242
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
12
DID YOU KNOW Some third-party applications
?
take over a button when you install the
application. For example, after you subscribe
to Push to Talk, the application permanently
takes over the Side button. If you cancel your
subscription to PTT, you must do a hard reset
to be able to reassign the Side button to
another application.
Changing default applications
4
Select Done.
Sometimes one application looks for
another application to handle information
(for example, a mail application might open
a browser when you select a link in an
email message). Your Centro comes with a
set of predefined applications to handle
email, messaging, and browser requests
from other applications. If you have more
than one application to handle these
requests on your Centro, you can specify
which application you want to use for each
function.
Locking your Centro
and info
Your Centro includes several features that
protect it from inadvertent use and keep
your information private. You can lock any
of the following features on your Centro:
Keyboard (Keyguard): You can use the
Keyguard feature to disable the keyboard
and all buttons to prevent accidental
presses in your bag or pocket.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Default Apps.
and select
.
2
3
Screen: You can disable the screen’s
touch-sensitive feature during an active call
or call alert.
Select each pick list and select the
application you want to associate with
that function.
L O C K I N G Y O U R C E N T R O A N D I N F O
243
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
12
Phone (Phone Lock): You can set your
phone to require a password for making
calls. The built-in security software lets you
make emergency calls even if your phone
is locked.
Centro: You can set your Centro to require
a password for viewing any information on
your Centro.
Entries: You can mask or hide entries
marked as private and set your Centro to
require a password for viewing them.
You can change how quickly Keyguard turns
on, or you can disable this feature
altogether. To change the Keyguard
settings, do the following:
Locking your keyboard (Keyguard)
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Keyguard.
and select
The Keyguard feature locks the keyboard so
that you don’t accidentally press buttons or
activate items on the screen while your
Centro is in a pocket or bag.
.
2
3
Select the Auto-Keyguard pick list, and
then do one of the following:
By default, Keyguard turns on whenever
the screen is off. Each time you wake up
the screen, you must turn off Keyguard to
unlock the keyboard and use your Centro.
• Select how quickly you want Keyguard
to turn on: When power is turned
off, 5 seconds after power off, or 30
seconds after power off.
To turn off Keyguard, do the following:
• Select Disable to completely disable
1
When the screen is off, press Power/
End to wake up the screen.
Press Center to turn off Keyguard.
the Keyguard feature until you turn it
on again by pressing Option
+
Power/End when the screen is on.
2
4
Select Done.
L O C K I N G Y O U R C E N T R O A N D I N F O
244
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
12
Locking your screen
Locking your phone (Phone Lock)
You can lock your SIM card to prevent
You can set your Centro to automatically
lock the screen’s touch-sensitive features in unauthorized calls and use of other
certain situations.
wireless features. When your SIM card is
locked, you must enter the correct PIN
code to unlock it, even if you move it to a
different phone. You can still make
emergency calls when your phone is
locked, however.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Keyguard.
and select
.
2
3
Check any of the following boxes:
Incoming calls received: Disables the
screen when the phone rings. You must
IMPORTANT If your SIM card is locked
and you enter the wrong PIN more than
three times, you must call AT&T for your
unique PIN unlock key (PUK) to unlock your
SIM card.
use the 5-way
to select the
onscreen Answer and Ignore buttons,
or press Send to answer the call or
Power/End to ignore the call.
On a call: Disables the screen after you
answer a call. You must use the
TIP When Phone Lock is turned on, other
people can still see the info on your Centro,
but they cannot make or receive phone calls
or use the other wireless features without
your password.
5-way
to select the onscreen
buttons during the call. Use this setting
to avoid accidentally pressing onscreen
buttons while you’re holding your
Centro near your ear to speak.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
4
Select Done.
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select Phone
Lock.
DID YOU KNOW When you check the boxes to
?
disable the touchscreen during a call, the
touchscreen is automatically enabled again
after you end the call.
4
Check the Lock SIM box.
L O C K I N G Y O U R C E N T R O A N D I N F O
245
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
12
5
6
7
When prompted, enter the current PIN
and select OK. (Unless you changed
your PIN, enter the default PIN,
To disable the current Phone Lock settings:
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
Press Menu
.
provided with AT&T account materials.)
Select Options, and then select Phone
If you want to change the PIN, select
Change PIN, enter a new PIN, and then
select OK. Repeat this step to verify the
new PIN.
Lock.
4
5
6
Uncheck the Lock SIM box.
Enter your PIN code.
Select OK.
If your SIM card supports fixed number
dialing (FDN), select Advanced and
check the Enable Fixed Number
Dialing box to restrict dialing to the
numbers in your FDN list. When
prompted, enter your PIN2 and then
select OK.
Locking your Centro
To protect your personal information, you
can lock your Centro so that you need to
enter your password to access any of your
information or to use any of the features on
your Centro, including the phone. You can,
however, still make emergency calls when
your Centro is locked.
8
9
Turn your phone off to activate the
phone lock feature.
To turn your phone on again, press and
hold Power/End , enter your PIN, and
then select OK to unlock your Centro.
IMPORTANT If you lock your Centro, you
must enter the exact password to unlock it.
If you forget the password, you need to
perform a hard reset to resume using your
Centro. Performing a hard reset while your
Centro is password locked deletes all the
entries in your Centro and completely
reformats it. If you use password
TIP To manage your FDN list, press
Applications, select SIM Book, press Menu,
and then select Modify FDN from the
Options menu.
Your SIM card locks again when you turn
off your Centro and then turn it back on.
protection in Palm Desktop software, you
L O C K I N G Y O U R C E N T R O A N D I N F O
246
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
12
must remember your password to restore
your info. However, if you do not use
password protection in Palm Desktop
software, you can restore all previously
synchronized info the next time you sync
basics).
1
2
Press Applications
Security
Select the Password box.
and select
.
On power off: Locks your Centro when
you turn off the screen, or when it
shuts off with the Auto-off feature.
At a preset time: Locks your Centro at
a specific time of day.
After a preset delay: Locks your Centro
after a period of inactivity.
7
8
Select OK.
Do one of the following:
• Select Lock & Turn Off to lock your
Centro immediately.
3
4
5
Assign a password and a password hint.
Select the Auto Lock Device box.
• Press Applications
to accept
your settings and continue using your
Centro.
When prompted, enter your password
and select OK.
6
Select one of the following options:
Never: Prevents your Centro from
locking automatically.
L O C K I N G Y O U R C E N T R O A N D I N F O
247
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
12
define a password, you must enter it to
display private entries. If you do not define
a password, you (or anyone else) can reveal
private entries without a password.
TIP After you create a password, you can lock
your system manually. Press Applications
and select Security. Select Lock & Turn Off,
and then select Off & Lock.
1
Open the entry that you want to mark
private.
TIP To change your password, select the
Password box, enter your current password,
and then enter the new password. To delete
your password, select the Password box and
then select Unassign.
2
3
4
Select Details.
Check the Private box.
Select OK.
Working with private entries
Hiding or masking all private entries
In most applications, you can mark
individual entries as private. All private
entries remain visible and accessible until
you select the Security setting. You have
three Security setting options:
Make sure the entries you want to mask or
hide are marked private.
1
Press Applications
Security
and select
.
Show Records: Private records are visible.
2
Select the Current Privacy pick list and
select either Hide Records or Mask
Records.
Hide Records: Private entries do not
appear anywhere in the application.
3
If prompted for your password, enter it
and then select OK.
Mask Records: Private entries are
replaced with a gray bar that lets you know
the entry is there but keeps it from being
legible.
Viewing all private records
You can reveal all the entries you’ve hidden
or masked.
After you enable the mask or hide setting,
any entries marked as private are
immediately hidden or masked. If you
1
Press Applications
Security
and select
.
L O C K I N G Y O U R C E N T R O A N D I N F O
248
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
12
2
3
Select the Current Privacy pick list and marked as private are deleted. You can
select Show Records.
restore your private entries the next time
you sync, and then create a new password.
If prompted for your password, enter it
and then select OK.
Follow these steps to recover from a lost
password:
Viewing private entries in a specific
application
1
Press Applications
Security
and select
.
1
Open the application that contains the
private entries you want to see.
2
3
4
Select the Password box.
Select Lost Password.
Select Ye s .
2
3
Press Menu
.
Select Options, and then select
Security.
TIP If you want additional security for
Palm Desktop files, you may want to purchase
a third-party solution.
4
Select the Current Privacy pick list and
select Show Records.
5
6
Select OK.
If prompted for your password, enter it
Entering owner information
and then select OK.
You can use Owner Preferences to record
information that you want to associate with
your Centro, such as your name, company
name, and home phone number. If you lock
Owner Preferences information appears on
the screen that requests your password to
unlock it, and you must also enter your
password to change the Owner
Security Password and Palm Desktop
software (Windows)
You can set the Windows version of
Palm® Desktop software to observe the
security password for your Centro. If you
forget your password, you cannot view
your information in Palm Desktop. If your
Centro is unlocked, you can change your
password on your Centro, but all entries
Preferences information.
L O C K I N G Y O U R C E N T R O A N D I N F O
249
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
12
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Owner.
and select
network when your phone is on and you
are inside a coverage area. Date & Time
Preferences also enable you to manually
set the date, time, and location (time zone)
setting for your Centro.
.
2
3
If you assigned a password with the
Security application, select Unlock,
enter your password, and then select
OK to continue.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Date & Time.
and select
.
4
Enter the text that you want to appear in
the Owner Preferences screen.
2
3
Select the Automatically set pick list
and select one of the following settings:
NOTE The options that appear on the
screen vary based on the setting you select
in step 3.
Date, time and time zone: The date,
time, and time zone are acquired from
the AT&T network.
Date and time: Lets you set the time
zone manually. The date and time are
acquired from the AT&T network.
5
Select Done.
This setting is useful when you travel
from one time zone to another. You can
enter an appointment in your calendar
and set no time zone. When you get to
your destination time zone, the
System settings
Setting the date and time
By default, your Centro synchronizes the
date, time, and time zone with the AT&T
S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S
250
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
12
appointment appears on your calendar
at the correct local time.
6
Select Done.
TIP You can also set time zones for Calendar
Nothing: Lets you set the date, time,
and time zone manually. No info is
acquired from the AT&T network.
Optimizing power settings
Power Preferences enable you to adjust
settings to maximize the battery’s
performance.
1
Press Applications
Prefs
Select Power.
and select
.
2
3
Set any of the following preferences:
Brightness: Sets the intensity of the
screen backlight. Drag the slider or
press Left and Right to adjust the
brightness level.
4
If the Location pick list appears, select
it, and then select a city in your time
zone.
TIP If a city in the same time zone is not on
the list, select Edit List, select Add, select a
city in your time zone, and then select OK. If
necessary, modify any of the settings in the
Edit Location dialog box, and then select OK.
5
If the Date and Time fields appear,
select the Date field and select the
date, and then select the Time field and
select the time.
S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S
251
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
12
Auto-off after: Determines how long
4
Select Done.
your screen stays on during a period of
inactivity. When there is no interaction
with the keyboard or screen for the
specified time period, your Centro turns
off automatically.
TIP You can also access the brightness setting
by pressing Option + P. To temporarily set the
backlight to the preset low setting, press
Option + Menu.
Backlight during calls: To preserve
power during an active call, you can set
the screen backlight either to dim or
turn off after a specified amount of time.
Turning off the backlight saves more
power than dimming it. With the
backlight turned off, you can still see a
faint image on the screen and use any
of the buttons on the screen. To return
backlight brightness to normal, press
any key or tap the screen. Be careful;
pressing Power/End hangs up an active
call, and tapping an onscreen button
activates that command.
Connecting to a VPN
If you want to use your Centro to access
your corporate email account or other files
on your corporate server, you may need to
set up a virtual private network (VPN) on
your Centro. A VPN enables you to log in to
your corporate server through the
company’s firewall (security layer). You
need a VPN client on your Centro if your
Centro and your company’s server are
located on opposite sides of the firewall.
Beam Receive: Determines whether
your Centro is ready to receive
Check with your company’s system
administrator to see if a VPN is required for
accessing the corporate server. If a VPN is
required, you must purchase and install a
third-party VPN client on your Centro to
use this feature.
information over an infrared beam. If
you leave this option turned off, you
must return to this screen to turn on
this option the next time you want to
receive a beamed item.
C O N N E C T I N G T O
A
V P N
252
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
12
TIP For information about third-party VPN
1
2
Install your third-party VPN client. See
Installing applications for details.
Press Applications
Prefs
Select VPN.
and select
.
3
4
Enter the settings provided by your
corporate system administrator.
C O N N E C T I N G T O
A
V P N
253
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S
12
C O N N E C T I N G T O
A
V P N
254
In this chapter
Upgrading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
•
•
•
Set data connection features, such as
activating or ending data connections
Upgrading
Provide web-clipping features, such as
PQA files
If you experience problems with your
Palm® Centro™ smart device after
performing the upgrade steps in this guide,
you may have incompatible applications or
settings that were not quarantined during
the installation process. These
incompatible applications or settings can
lead to numerous issues, including system
resets and freezes. If you experience a
problem after upgrading, follow the steps
in this section to remove the incompatible
apps from your Centro and to transfer your
other info to your new Centro.
Provide instant messaging features
If you want to continue using these types
of applications, please contact the
third-party developer for software updates
and for info about compatibility with your
Centro.
WINDOWS ONLY
Use the following instructions to upgrade
your Centro on a Windows XP computer.
1
On your computer, click Start >
Programs > Palm > Safe HotSync.
NOTE If you have trouble installing a
third-party application, contact the
developer for assistance.
2
3
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Locate the Old_Apps folder on your
computer. This folder is usually located
inside one of the following folders:
C:\Program Files\Palm\
We recommend that you do not install
apps that do any of the following:
C:\Program Files\palmOne\
C:\Program Files\Handspring\
•
•
Modify phone functions, such as
ringtones, dialing, or caller ID
4
To help you identify the app that is
causing the problem, move one app at a
time from the Old_Apps folder to the
Backup folder, and then sync.
Replace organizer features, such as
Contacts or Calendar
U P G R A D I N G
257
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
If the problem recurs, delete the last
app you installed and report the
problem to its developer.
3
Confirm that your copy includes the
Backup subfolder and that all the files in
the original Backup subfolder are also in
the copy of the Backup subfolder.
5
Repeat step 4 for each of the apps in
the Old_Apps folder.
4
5
Delete all files from the original Backup
subfolder.
NOTE If you have trouble moving apps
from the Old_Apps folder to the Backup
folder, or determining which files to move,
try reinstalling the app using the original
third-party developer files.
Perform a hard reset on your Centro.
instructions.
6
7
Sync your Centro with your new
desktop software and be sure to select
your existing device name from the
User list.
TIP Need more info on the Backup folder? See
To help you identify the app that is
causing the problem, move one
third-party app from the copy of the
Backup subfolder to the original
Backup subfolder, and then sync.
MAC ONLY
1
Locate your user folder on your
computer.
If the problem recurs, delete the last
app you installed and report the
problem to its developer.
NOTE Your user folder name is the same
as your device name and is usually found in
this location: <Mac hard drive> : Users :
<your Mac username> : Documents :
Palm : Users
8
Repeat step 7 for each of the third-party
apps in the copy of the Backup folder.
2
Select your user folder and Option-drag
it to your Mac desktop to make a copy
of that folder.
U P G R A D I N G
258
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
3
4
Quit any active applications, including
virus scanners and Internet security
applications.
Desktop software
installation
Make sure you’re installing the software
from the Getting Started CD that came
with your new Centro. Other versions of
the desktop software may not work
with your Centro.
If you are having trouble installing the
desktop software, you may have the wrong
version of the software or some of your
computer’s resources may be unavailable.
5
Insert the Getting Started CD to restart
the installation.
TIP The Getting Started CD installs software
that lets you synchronize using Palm® Desktop
software or Microsoft Outlook for Windows. If
you want to synchronize using a different
personal information manager (PIM), you
must install a third-party solution. Contact the
PIM’s author or vendor to learn if software
is available for your Centro.
IMPORTANT Always use the same
language for your Centro, your computer
operating system, and your desktop
software. Otherwise, you may lose
information or have difficulty with
synchronization. Support is not provided for
mismatched language setups.
Follow these steps to retry the installation.
1
Make sure your computer profile
includes administrator rights to install
software. In large organizations, these
are usually granted by the system
administrator.
Resetting your
Centro
Performing a soft reset
2
Restart your computer.
Performing a soft reset is similar to
restarting a computer. If your Centro is not
responding or you have trouble
D E S K T O P S O F T W A R E I N S T A L L A T I O N
259
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
synchronizing with your computer, a soft
reset may help. All your info is retained
when you perform a soft reset.
Don’t know how? See Replacing the
2
When the Palm logo appears, press and
1
Remove the battery from your Centro,
and then reinsert it.
hold Up
until the black status bar at
the bottom of the screen fills and
disappears, and then release Up
.
Don’t know how? See Replacing the
3
4
Delete the third-party application that
you suspect is causing the problem.
NOTE The reset begins when you reinsert
the battery.
Perform a soft reset. The wireless
features of your Centro are not available
until you complete this step.
2
At the end of the soft reset, Date &
Time Preferences appears. Select
Done.
Performing a hard reset
A hard reset erases all information and
third-party software on your Centro. Never
perform a hard reset without first trying a
soft reset and a system reset and trying to
resolve third-party software issues. (See
Third-party applications for suggestions on
diagnosing third-party software issues.)
After a hard reset, you can restore
Performing a system reset
A system reset, also called a safe or warm
reset, tells your Centro to stop what it’s
doing and start over again without loading
any system extras. If your Centro loops or
freezes during or after a soft reset, a
system reset may help. Performing a
system reset can release your Centro from
an endless loop so that you can uninstall a
third-party application that may be causing
the looping.
previously synchronized information the
next time you sync.
IMPORTANT If you set a password on
your Centro, performing a hard reset
reformats your Centro. This is a more
severe form of a hard reset, which
1
Remove the battery from your Centro,
and then reinsert it.
R E S E T T I N G Y O U R C E N T R O
260
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
removes all your information, and restores
your formats, preferences, and other
settings to the factory default settings.
your Centro until the process is complete.
This may take up to 10 minutes.
4
When the language selection screen
appears, select the same language you
selected for your desktop software.
TIP Some third-party applications do not
create a backup on your computer when you
synchronize. If you perform a hard reset, you
may lose data in these applications and you
will need to reinstall the application after the
hard reset. Please contact the application’s
developer to find out which data is backed up
during synchronization.
IMPORTANT Always use the same
language for your Centro, your computer
operating system, and your desktop
software. Otherwise, you may lose
information or have difficulty with
synchronization. Support is not provided for
mismatched language setups.
1
2
Remove the battery from your Centro,
and then reinsert it.
5
(Optional) If you want to confirm that
the hard reset was successful,
immediately afterward, press
Don’t know how? See Replacing the
Applications
HotSync
appears in the upper-right corner, the
and select
. If your device name
When the Palm logo appears, press and
hold Power/End until the black
status bar at the bottom of the screen
fills and disappears, and then release
hard reset was not successful.
Power/End
.
3
When the Erase all data? prompt
Replacing the battery
appears, press Up
to confirm the
hard reset.
Your Centro comes with a replaceable
battery. Be sure to use a replacement
IMPORTANT If a Reformatting in
progress message appears, do not touch
R E P L A C I N G T H E B A T T E R Y
261
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
battery that is recommended or sold by
Palm and is compatible with the Centro.
4
Align the metal contacts on the new
battery with the contacts inside the
battery compartment, insert the new
battery into the compartment at a
45-degree angle, and then press it into
place.
CAUTION Failure to use the proper battery
may result in a risk of personal injury or
product damage, and it voids your Centro
warranty.
Battery contacts
1
2
Press Power/End to turn off the
screen.
Centro
contacts
Press the Battery door near the top
where the door and camera sections
meet and slide it downward to remove
it from your Centro.
Battery door
IMPORTANT Use the battery that came
with your Centro. Do not use a battery
from another Centro model in your Centro.
Similarly, do not use the Centro battery in
another Centro model. Using a battery that
is designed for another Centro model can
damage your Centro.
3
Place a finger in the notch next to the
battery, and lift up the old battery at a
45-degree angle to remove it from the
compartment.
5
Slide the battery door onto the back of
the Centro until it clicks into place.
R E P L A C I N G T H E B A T T E R Y
262
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
6
Connect your Centro to the charger or
sync cable to charge the new battery.
3
Look closely at the screen. If you can
see a dim image, try adjusting the
TIP Be sure to dispose of your old battery
properly. In some areas, disposal in household
or business trash is prohibited.
4
5
If the screen is still blank, perform a soft
If the problem persists, connect your
Centro to the charger (see Charging the
battery) and perform a soft reset again.
Screen
6
If that doesn’t work, perform a hard
The screen appears blank
1
When a call lasts longer than the limit
specified in Power Preferences, the
screen dims automatically. In certain
lighting conditions, the screen may
appear blank when this occurs.
TIP To find carrying cases that protect the
screen, and other useful accessories, visit
Press any key except Power/End to
restore the screen to normal brightness.
Pressing Power/End hangs up the call.
The screen backlight may also be set to
dim or turn off after a specified amount
The screen doesn’t respond accurately to
taps or it activates wrong features
1
2
3
Press Applications
.
Use the 5-way
to select Prefs
to select
.
Use the 5-way
Touchscreen.
2
When a period of inactivity lasts longer
than the limit specified in Power
Preferences, the screen turns off. Press
4
5
Follow the onscreen instructions to
align the screen.
and release Power/End
to wake up
Select Done.
the screen.
S C R E E N
263
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
6
7
If the problem persists, check for dirt
between the screen and the edge of the hard reset or otherwise need to erase all
Centro.
vice versa. If you ever need to perform a
your information on your Centro, you can
synchronize your Centro with your
computer to restore the info. Similarly, if
your computer crashes and your Palm
Desktop info is damaged, you can recover
your info by synchronizing with your
Centro. To make sure you always have an
up-to-date backup of your info, synchronize
frequently.
If you’re using a screen protector, make
sure that it is properly installed.
There’s a blinking bell in the upper-left
corner
The blinking bell in the upper-left corner of
the screen is the Alert icon. It appears
when you have alarms or messages that
you haven’t acknowledged.
This section describes synchronization
between your Centro and a desktop
computer running Palm Desktop software.
You can also synchronize the information
on your Centro using third-party
1
Press and hold Center
or tap the
blinking bell with your stylus.
2
When the list of pending alerts appears,
do either of the following:
applications. See the documentation for
• Select the text of the alert to view the the third-party application for information
item. The item stays in the list.
on features and configuration.
• Check the box next to an alert to clear
it from the list, and then select Done.
Before you attempt to synchronize, make
sure you’ve installed the desktop
synchronization software from the Getting
Started CD.
Synchronization
TIP Every device needs a unique name. Never
synchronize more than one device to the
same device name on your computer.
Synchronization backs up the information
from your Centro onto your computer and
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N
264
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
I can’t find my user folder
into the Backup folder.) The next time you
sync, the HotSync manager compares the
contents of the Backup folder to the
contents of your Centro, and then restores
any missing info or applications.
Windows: If your device name is one
word, your user folder name is the first six
characters of your device name. If your
device name is two words, your user folder
name consists of the first six characters of
the second word of your device name,
followed by the first letter of the first word.
For example, if your device name is John
Smith, your user folder is named SmithJ.
Your user folder is usually located inside
one of the following folders:
If an app that you deleted reappears on
your Centro, try deleting the app from your
Backup folder.
Palm Desktop does not respond to a sync
attempt
1
Make sure that the USB sync cable is
securely connected to the USB port on
your computer and on the bottom of
your Centro (see Synchronizing
C:\Program Files\Palm\
C:\Program Files\palmOne\
C:\Program Files\Handspring\
Mac: Your user folder name is the same as
your device name and is usually found in
this location: <Mac hard drive> : Users :
<your Mac username> : Documents :
Palm : Users
TIP If you’re having trouble trying to sync
using an IR or Bluetooth® wireless technology
connection, try using the USB sync cable
instead. If this solves the problem, check your
IR or Bluetooth settings (see Synchronizing
What is the backup folder?
The Backup folder is located inside your
During synchronization, the HotSync®
manager puts a copy of most of your info
and applications into the Backup folder.
(Some third-party apps do not put a copy
2
Make sure that the HotSync manager is
running:
Windows: Right-click HotSync
manager
in the taskbar in the
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N
265
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
lower-right corner of your computer
6
If problems persist and you’re
synchronizing through a USB hub, try
connecting the sync cable to a different
USB port or directly to your computer’s
built-in USB port.
screen, and make sure that Local USB
is checked. If you don’t see the HotSync
manager icon, click Start, select
Programs, select Palm, and then select
HotSync manager.
7
8
Synchronize. If the synchronization is
successful, you do not need to
complete the remaining steps.
Check the multi-connector on the
bottom of your Centro for debris or
discoloration. Carefully clean the
connector by dipping a cotton swab in
some rubbing alcohol and gently wiping
the metal contacts on the connector.
Try to sync again.
Mac: Find the Palm folder on your Mac
hard drive. Double-click the HotSync
manager
icon in the Palm folder. In
the Connection Settings panel, set the
Local Setup port to Palm USB.
9
Check the connector on the USB sync
cable for integrity and cleanliness. Make
sure the pins on the connector are
straight, protruding, and not damaged. If
the cable appears to be damaged, stop
here and locate another USB sync
cable.
3
Synchronize. If the synchronization is
successful, you do not need to
complete the remaining steps.
4
5
Perform a soft reset (see Performing a
Synchronize. If the synchronization is
successful, you do not need to
complete the remaining steps.
10 WINDOWS ONLY Uninstall
Palm Desktop software. Click Start,
select Settings, select Control Panel,
select Add or Remove Programs,
select Palm Desktop software, and
then click Change/Remove.
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N
266
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
NOTE Mac computers do not provide an
option for uninstalling Palm Desktop
software. Contact Support if the problem
persists after you complete step 7.
1
Locate your Backup subfolder and
rename the folder (for example,
BackupOld).
Windows: C:\Program
Files\Palm\<device name>
11 Restart your computer.
Mac: <Mac hard drive> : Applications
: Palm : Users : <device name>
12 Reinstall Palm Desktop software from
the Getting Started CD that came with
your Centro.
NOTE Can’t find a Palm folder in Program
Files? Then look for a palmOne or
Handspring folder instead. For more info,
Synchronization starts but stops without
finishing
TIP The HotSync Log can give you information
about your most recent synchronization.
2
3
Synchronize.
If the problem is resolved, begin
reinstalling your third-party applications
one at a time by double-clicking a single
file in the original Backup subfolder that
you renamed, and sync after each
application you install. If the problem
recurs, delete the last application you
installed and report the problem to its
developer.
Windows: Right-click the HotSync manager
icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of
your computer screen, and then select View
Log.
Mac: Open Palm Desktop software. From the
HotSync menu, select View Log.
If you upgraded from a previous Palm OS®
device or received a system error, such as
Sys0505, there may be conflicts with
software on your Centro.
4
WINDOWS ONLY If the Windows New
Hardware Wizard appears, the
synchronization process may be timing
out before the wizard completes its job.
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N
267
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
Follow all instructions in the New
Hardware Wizard, and then sync again.
Getting Started CD and select Change
your synchronization method if
necessary. If you use a different PIM,
you need to install third-party software
to synchronize. For more information,
consult the company that makes the
PIM.
5
WINDOWS ONLY Uninstall
Palm Desktop software. Click Start,
select Settings, select Control Panel,
select Add or Remove Programs,
select Palm Desktop software, and
then click Change/Remove.
2
3
If multiple Palm OS devices are
synchronizing with your computer,
make sure the name of the device you
are synchronizing appears in the User
field on the toolbar of Palm Desktop
software.
NOTE Mac computers do not provide an
option for uninstalling Palm Desktop
software. Contact Technical Support if the
problem persists after you complete
step 3.
Open HotSync manager on your
computer, and make sure the necessary
conduits are set to Synchronize the
files.
6
7
Restart your computer.
Reinstall Palm Desktop software from
the Getting Started CD that came with
your Centro.
TIP For more info on Outlook conduits,
right-click the HotSync manager icon in the
taskbar, select Custom, select an app with
Outlook in its name, and then select Help.
Synchronization finishes but info doesn’t
appear where it should
1
Make sure you’re synchronizing with
the intended desktop personal
NOTE If you need to change the setting to
Synchronize the files, be sure to check
the Set as default box as well.
information manager (PIM). The Getting
Started CD enables you to choose
whether you want to synchronize with
Palm Desktop software or Microsoft
Outlook for Windows. Reinsert the
4
WINDOWS ONLY Uninstall
Palm Desktop software. Click Start,
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N
268
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
select Settings, select Control Panel,
select Add or Remove Programs,
select Palm Desktop software, and
then click Change/Remove.
I have duplicate entries in Microsoft
Outlook after I sync
1
Open Microsoft Outlook and delete the
duplicate entries.
MAC ONLY Mac computers do not
provide an option for uninstalling Palm
Desktop software. Contact Support if
the problem persists after you complete
step 3.
2
On your computer, go to the application
with duplicate entries and manually
enter any info you added to your Centro
since the last time you synchronized.
3
4
Right-click HotSync manager
in the
5
6
Restart your computer.
taskbar and select Custom.
Reinstall Palm Desktop software from
the Getting Started CD that came with
your Centro.
Select an application that has duplicate
entries and also has Outlook in its
name.
7
(Outlook only) If you’re trying to
synchronize offline, set your Outlook
Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks to
be available offline.
5
6
Click Change.
Select Desktop overwrites handheld,
and then click OK.
7
If more than one application has
duplicate entries, repeat steps 4
through 6 for each application with
duplicates.
TIP Outlook subfolders and public folders are
not accessible with the included software. You
may want to use a third-party solution instead.
8
9
Click Done.
TIP (Outlook only) If you want to sync your
info with a global Exchange Address Book,
you must copy the addresses to your local
Contacts list in Outlook (right-click the
addresses and select Add to Personal
Address Book).
Synchronize your Centro and your
computer.
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N
269
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
My appointments show up in the wrong
time slot after I sync
6
7
Click Change.
Select Desktop overwrites handheld,
If you create an appointment in the wrong
time zone (that is, your desktop was set to
the wrong time zone), it shows up in the
wrong time zone on your Centro. To be
safe, enable local network time and avoid
assigning time zones to your
and then click OK.
8
9
Synchronize your Centro and your
computer.
Repeat steps 4 through 6 to open the
Calendar Change HotSync Action dialog
box again.
appointments.
10 Make sure Synchronize the files is
selected and Set as default is checked,
and then click OK.
If you’re using Microsoft Outlook:
1
Make sure that you installed the
Microsoft Outlook conduit that came
with your Centro. If you’re not sure
whether this software is installed,
reinstall Palm Desktop software from
the Getting Started CD that came with
your Centro.
You should now be able to assign time
zones to your events without encountering
this problem.
If you’re using Palm Desktop software:
1
2
3
On your Centro, press Calendar
Press Menu
.
2
3
Open Microsoft Outlook and correct the
wrong entries.
.
Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
On your computer, manually enter any
Calendar info you added to your Centro
since the last time you synchronized.
4
5
Uncheck the New events use time
zones box (if it’s checked).
4
5
Click HotSync manager
taskbar and select Custom.
in the
On your computer, open Palm Desktop
software and correct the wrong entries.
Select an application that has both
Calendar and Outlook in its name.
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N
270
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
6
7
On your computer, manually enter any
Calendar info you added to your Centro
since the last time you synchronized.
The text of my memos is truncated after I
sync
If you use your desktop software to create
a memo that is longer than 4,096
characters, the excess characters are
truncated when you transfer the memo to
your Centro.
Click HotSync manager
in the
taskbar and select Custom.
8
9
Select Calendar.
Click Change.
10 Select Desktop overwrites handheld,
and then click OK.
Phone
11 Synchronize your Centro and your
computer.
Signal strength is weak
12 Repeat steps 7 through 9 to open the
Calendar Change HotSync Action dialog
box again.
Become familiar with low coverage areas
where you live, commute, work, and play.
Then you will know when to expect signal
strength issues. You can check signal
strength by looking at the Signal Strength
icon in the title bar of the Main tab in
the Phone application. The stronger the
signal, the more bars that appear. If you are
outside a coverage area, no bars appear.
13 Make sure Synchronize the files is
selected and Set as default is checked,
and then click OK.
You should now be able to assign time
zones to your events without
encountering this problem.
IMPORTANT To avoid this problem in the
future, do not assign time zones to your
events. Palm Desktop software does not
support time zones.
1
2
3
If you’re standing, move about ten feet
in any direction.
If you’re in a building, move near a
window. Open any metal blinds.
If you’re in a building, move outdoors or
to a more open area.
P H O N E
271
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
4
5
If you’re outdoors, move away from
large buildings, trees, or electrical wires.
the microphone hole, which is on the
bottom right side of the Centro.
If you’re in a vehicle, move your Centro
so that it’s close to a window of your
vehicle.
•
If you’re using the speakerphone
feature with your Centro lying on a flat
surface, try turning the Centro face
down (screen facing the surface).
My Centro won’t connect to the mobile
network
I hear my own voice echo
1
Try the suggestions about signal
strength described in Signal strength is
weak.
Ask the person on the other end of the call
to turn down the volume on his or her
phone or to hold the phone closer to his or
her ear.
2
3
Turn off your phone and turn it on again
My voice is too quiet on the other end
Remove the SIM card (this causes a soft
reset) and reinsert it (see Inserting the
•
Be sure to place the bottom of the
Centro, or the hands-free microphone,
close to your mouth.
The other person hears an echo
•
Check the Signal Strength
icon in
the title bar of the Main tab in the
Phone application. If the signal is weak
(few bars are displayed), try the
suggestions about signal strength
•
Try decreasing the volume on your
Centro to avoid coupling or feedback on
the other person’s end. This applies to
both the speakerphone and the
earpiece.
•
Position the earpiece closer to your ear
to prevent sound leaking back to the
microphone. Keep your hand away from
I hear static or interference
Check the Signal Strength
title bar of the Main tab in the Phone
icon in the
application. If the signal is weak (few bars
P H O N E
272
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
are displayed), try the suggestions about
My Centro makes or answers calls when
Items in your bag or pocket may be
If you’re using a Bluetooth® hands-free
pressing the onscreen Answer button or
otherwise activating screen items. If this
happens, be sure to press Power/End
to turn off the screen before placing your
Centro in a bag or pocket. You may also
want to disable the screen’s
My phone seems to turn off by itself
touch-sensitive feature during incoming
If a system error and reset occur, the
Centro automatically turns the phone on if
it was on before the reset. However, if the
Centro can’t determine if your phone was
on before the reset, the phone does not
phone on and off). If the problem persists
and you’re using third-party applications,
suggestions.
TIP To find carrying cases that can help
prevent your Centro from making calls, as well
as other useful accessories, visit att.com/
wirelessaccessories or visit your local AT&T
store.
Hands-free devices
TIP Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet in
optimum environmental conditions.
Performance and range may be affected by
physical obstacles, radio interference from
nearby electronic equipment, and other
factors.
H A N D S - F R E E D E V I C E S
273
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
I can’t make or receive calls using a
Bluetooth® hands-free device
I hear static or interference when using
my Bluetooth hands-free device
Confirm all the following:
•
Try moving your Centro closer to the
hands-free device. Audio quality
degrades as the distance between your
Centro and hands-free device increases.
The effective range for a device varies
between manufacturers.
•
The Bluetooth device is compatible with
centro-att/ for a list of compatible
devices.
•
•
Press Applications
Bluetooth . Make sure the
Bluetooth setting is set to On.
and select
•
•
Confirm that no obstructions, including
your body, are between your Centro and
your hands-free device.
You have already formed a partnership
between your Centro and your
hands-free device, and the hands-free
device appears in the Trusted Devices
If the problem persists, turn the
Bluetooth setting to Off and then turn it
back on again. If it still persists, create a
new partnership with the hands-free
•
•
Your hands-free device is charged and
turned on.
TIP For best performance, keep your
Bluetooth hands-free device and your phone
on the same side of your body.
Your Centro is within range of the
hands-free device.
If the problem persists, turn the Bluetooth
setting to Off and then turn it on again. If it
still persists, delete the partnership, and
then create a new partnership with the
hands-free device (see Connecting to a
Some features of my Bluetooth
hands-free device don’t work with my
Centro
•
Check the Palm compatibility list at
go.palm.com/centro-att/ to ensure that
your device is compatible.
H A N D S - F R E E D E V I C E S
274
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
•
Check the documentation that came
with your device or the manufacturer’s
website for information specific to
your device.
your location. AT&T should be able to
tell you if text messaging services have
been experiencing transmission delays.
Delays can also occur between the time
that a message is sent and the time it is
received.
•
•
Verify with the recipient that the
receiving device can handle text
messages.
Email
•
For troubleshooting info on Xpress Mail,
If a text message arrives but does not
display an alert, perform a soft reset
•
For troubleshooting info on the
®
VersaMail application, see the User
Guide for the VersaMail Application on
the Palm Software Installation CD.
I can’t send or receive multimedia
messages
•
Make sure your phone is turned on (see
Messaging
•
Contact AT&T to verify that your plan
includes multimedia messaging
services (MMS), that these services
have been correctly activated, and that
they are available at your location. AT&T
should be able to tell you if multimedia
messaging services have been
I can’t send or receive text messages
•
Make sure your SIM card is inserted
correctly (see Inserting the SIM card
and battery) and your phone is turned on
experiencing transmission delays.
Delays can also occur between the time
that a message is sent and the time it is
received.
•
Contact AT&T to verify that your plan
includes text messaging services, that
these services have been correctly
activated, and that they are available at
E M A I L
275
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
•
Make sure that either of the following
icons appears in the title bar of the Main
tab: . If you do not see either of
these icons, data services are not
available in your current location and you
cannot exchange multimedia messages.
My Centro won’t connect to the Internet
Your Centro supports GPRS and EDGE
wireless data networks. To connect to the
Internet, you must subscribe to and
activate data services with AT&T, and you
must be in a location with data coverage.
•
•
Verify with the recipient that the
receiving device can handle multimedia
messages.
1
2
3
Press and hold Power/End to turn off
your phone. Then press and hold the
same button to turn it back on again.
If a message arrives but does not
display an alert, perform a soft reset
Press Phone
of the following icons in the title bar of
the Main tab:
and look for either
.
If you see these icons, you are in a data
coverage area. Try connecting to the
Internet again. If you do not see either
of these icons, press
Web
Applications
, select Prefs
,
I can’t tell if data services are available
and continue with the following steps.
When your phone is on, icons appear in the
title bar in the Main tab in the Phone
application to indicate whether data
4
5
Select Network.
Select the Service pick list and select
services are available and whether a data
connection is active. Make sure that either
of the following icons appears in the title
MEdia Net.
6
7
Select Connect.
If the connection is successful, go to
the web browser. If you still can’t make
a connection, perform a soft reset (see
bar of the Main tab:
. If you do not
see either of these icons, data services are
not available in your current location and
you cannot connect to the Internet.
W E B
276
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
8
9
If your phone did not turn on
automatically after the soft reset, press
and hold Power/End to turn on your
phone, and try connecting to the
Internet.
include Flash, Shockwave, VBScript,
WMLScript, and other plug-ins.
Some websites use a redirector to their
true home page. If the web browser on
your Centro can’t follow the redirector, try
using a desktop browser to see the landing
page of the redirector, and then enter that
address in the web browser on your
Centro.
Contact AT&T to verify the following:
• Your subscription plan includes
high-speed data services.
• Data services have been activated on
your account.
TIP Your Centro can open your email
application when you select an email address
on a web page. If nothing happens when you
select the link, make sure your email
application is already set up.
• Data coverage is available in your
location.
• There are no data service outages in
your location.
I can’t access a web page
It takes a long time for a web page to load
First, make sure you have Internet access:
Open the web browser and try to view
another web page you’ve loaded before. To
ensure you’re viewing the page directly
If it is taking longer than usual to load web
pages, you may have traveled from an
EDGE service area to a GPRS service area.
Although GPRS data service is considered
a high-speed data service, it seems slow if
you are used to EDGE speed.
from the Internet, press Menu
, select
Go, and then select Refresh.
If you can view the other web page after
you refresh it but you still can’t access the
page you were originally trying to view, the
page may contain elements that are not
supported by the web browser. These
1
Press Phone
of the following icons in the title bar of
the Main tab to confirm that you have a
and look for either
data connection:
.
WE B
277
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
2
Try opening a different web page to see You may also be able to save the image on
if the problem persists.
your Centro or an expansion card and then
view the image later on your computer.
• If you can open a different web page,
it is likely that the original website is
experiencing problems, and the
A secure site refuses to permit a
transaction
problem is not related to your Centro.
Some websites don’t support certain
browsers for transactions. Please contact
the site’s webmaster to make sure the site
allows transactions using Blazer™ web
browser from your Centro.
• If the problem persists on a different
web page, you may have a problem
with your connection to the AT&T
network.
3
4
To be sure there is not a problem with
your connection to the AT&T network,
press and hold Power/End to turn off
your phone. Then press and hold the
same button to turn it back on again.
My Bluetooth DUN connection isn’t
working
Check all of the following:
Try opening the web page again to see
if it loads faster.
•
Press Applications
and select
Bluetooth . Make sure the
Bluetooth setting is set to On.
An image or map is too small on
my screen
•
You have already formed a partnership
between your Centro and your
computer (see Creating a partnership
computer).
The web browser has two modes:
Optimized and Wide Page. Optimized
Mode resizes all images and page
elements to fit into a single column on the
Centro screen. Switch to Wide Page Mode
to see the full-size image (see Viewing a
web page).
•
•
The Bluetooth feature on your computer
is turned on.
Your Centro is within 30 feet of your
computer.
W E B
278
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
Camera
TIP Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet in
optimum environmental conditions.
Performance and range may be affected by
physical obstacles, radio interference from
nearby electronic equipment, and other
factors.
Here are some tips for taking good pictures
with the built-in camera:
•
Clean the camera’s lens with a soft,
lint-free cloth.
If the problem persists, try the following:
•
Take pictures in bright lighting
conditions. Low-light images may be
grainy, due to the sensitivity of the
camera.
•
Turn the Bluetooth setting to Off and
then turn it back on again.
•
Try moving your Centro closer to your
computer. The effective range for a
computer varies between
•
Hold the Centro as still as possible. Try
supporting your picture-taking arm
against your body or a stationary object
(such as a wall).
manufacturers.
•
•
Confirm that no obstructions, including
your body, are between your Centro and
your computer.
•
•
Keep the subject of the picture still.
Exposure time is longer with lower light
levels, so you may see a blur.
If the problem persists, create a new
partnership with your computer (see
For best results, verify that you have the
brightest light source coming from
behind you, lighting the subject’s face.
Avoid taking indoor pictures with the
subject in front of a window or light.
•
Make sure the subject is at least 18
inches away from the camera to ensure
good focus.
C A M E R A
279
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
Remember that when you synchronize
your Centro with your computer, your
camera images are stored in the My
Pictures/Palm Photos folder on your hard
memory on your Centro. Delete
messages with large attachments. If
you have hundreds of messages with or
without attachments, you may want to
delete older messages to make room
(see the User Guide for the VersaMail
Application on the Palm Software
Installation CD or the Xpress Mail
documentation at
Making room on your
Centro
•
Pictures & Videos: Large images take
up a lot of memory. Move images to an
expansion card or synchronize them to
your computer, and then delete the
images from your Centro (see Viewing
Keep in mind that your Centro includes an
expansion card slot, and that you can store
applications and information on expansion
cards (sold separately). However, you still
need free memory on the Centro itself to
run applications from an expansion card.
For more info on using expansion cards,
•
•
Music: Music files often consume a lot
of memory. Move music files to an
expansion card, or delete large files
from your Centro.
Messaging: Multimedia content can
also consume a lot of memory. Move
multimedia content to an expansion
card, or delete large files from your
If you store a large number of records or
install many third-party applications, the
internal memory on your Centro may fill up.
Here are some common ways to clear
space:
•
Internet: If you set a large web browser
cache, you may want to use the web
browser’s advanced Memory
•
Email: Messages that have large
attachments can quickly consume
M A K I N G R O O M O N Y O U R C E N T R O
280
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
Management settings to clear all recent
pages (see Customizing your web
1
2
Perform a soft reset (see Performing a
If the problem persists, perform a
reset).
•
Third-party applications: You can
delete infrequently used applications
(see Removing applications) or move
them to an expansion card (see Copying
3
Delete the most recently installed
application from your Centro (see
4
5
If the problem persists, perform another
system reset.
If possible, synchronize your Centro
with your computer to back up your
most recent info.
Third-party
applications
6
If you’re unable to perform the
preceding steps or the problem
persists, locate your Backup subfolder
on your computer and rename the
folder (for example, BackupOld).
Some third-party applications can cause
conflicts on your Centro. For example,
third-party applications that were not
written with the Centro keyboard and
5-way navigator in mind may cause strange
behavior or errors when using the keyboard
and 5-way navigator in these applications.
Third-party applications that modify
wireless features may require extra
troubleshooting.
Windows: C:\Program
Files\Palm\<device name>
Mac: <Mac hard drive> : Applications
: Palm : Users : <device name>
NOTE Can’t find a Palm folder in Program
Files? Then look for a palmOne or
Handspring folder instead. For more info,
If you recently installed an application and
your device seems to be stuck, try the
following:
T H I R D - P A R T Y A P P L I C A T I O N S
281
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
7
8
Perform a hard reset (see Performing a
Error messages
Sync to restore your info in Calendar,
Contacts, Tasks, Memos, and Pictures
& Videos.
Your Centro is designed to minimize
interruptions when a system error occurs.
If your Centro encounters a system error, it
automatically resets itself and resumes
functioning as normal. If possible, it even
turns the phone back on if it was on before
the error occurred.
9
If the problem is resolved, begin
reinstalling your third-party applications
one at a time by double-clicking a single
file in the original Backup subfolder that
you renamed, and sync after each
application you install.
Sometimes you might want to know more
about an error. Your Centro uses a special
interface to show error messages in
greater detail.
10 If the problem recurs, delete the last
application you installed and report the
problem to its developer.
1
2
3
Press Phone
.
I can’t exit a game or third-party
application
Enter #*377, and then press Send
.
Review the screen with details about
the conditions that led up to the most
recent automatic reset.
Press Option
+ Applications
to
return to Applications View.
4
Select OK.
Getting more help
Contact the author or vendor of the
third-party software if you require further
assistance.
E R R O R M E S S A G E S
282
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
NOTE Third-party developers create their
own error messages. If you do not
understand an error message, please
contact the developer of the application for
help.
E R R O R M E S S A G E S
283
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S
13
E R R O R M E S S A G E S
284
they can exchange information over short
distances. For more info, visit
Terms
Alt (alternative)
CSD (circuit-switched data)
A keyboard key. Enter a letter on the
A dial-up Internet connection. You pay for
the connection time, not for how much
information you transfer. Contrast with
GPRS.
keyboard, and then press Alt
variations such as international characters
and symbols.
to access
Applications View
Device name
The screen on your Palm® Centro™ smart
device from which you can open all
applications.
The name associated with your Centro and
with the info in your desktop software. The
device name (sometimes called the
username) distinguishes your Centro from
all other Palm OS devices. When you first
Auto-off interval
®
The time of inactivity that passes before
the screen on your Centro turns off. The
wireless features on your Centro are
unaffected by this setting.
synchronize your Centro, you are asked to
give it a device name. This name appears in
the User list in Palm Desktop software.
Every Palm OS device that is synchronized
with the same computer must have a
unique device name.
Beam
The process of sending or receiving an
entry or application using the infrared (IR)
port on your Centro.
Bluetooth® wireless technology
Dialog box
A set of options and command buttons that
is enclosed by a border and that enables
you to carry out a specific task.
Technology that enables devices such as
the Centro, mobile phones, and computers
to connect wirelessly to each other so that
T E R M S
285
EDGE (Enhanced Data rates for GSM
Evolution)
Infrared (IR)
A way of transmitting information using
An enhanced version of GPRS that delivers light waves; this is called beaming. The IR
data speeds that are up to three times
faster than standard GPRS connections.
(Additional charges may apply.)
port on your Centro enables you to transfer
information to other IR devices within a
short radius.
Favorite
Lithium ion (Li-ion)
A button that provides quick access to a
phone number (speed-dial button) or
commonly used application (such as Web
or Messaging). You can define an unlimited
number of favorite buttons in the Phone
application.
The rechargeable battery technology used
in the Centro.
MMS
An enhanced form of messaging that
enables you to send pictures, videos,
animations, sounds, and ringtones almost
instantly.
GPRS (General Packet Radio Service)
A mobile Internet connectivity technology
that allows persistent data connections.
(Additional charges may apply.)
Option key
The keyboard key that enables you to
access the alternative feature that is
indicated above the letter on each key.
®
HotSync
The technology that synchronizes your
Centro and your computer with the simple
press of a button.
Palm® Desktop software
A PIM application for computers that helps
you manage your personal information and
keep your personal information
HotSync manager
The computer application that manages the synchronized with your Centro.
synchronization of your Centro with your
computer.
T E R M S
286
Palm™ Install Tool
PIM (personal information manager)
The component on your Windows
computer that enables you to install Palm
OS applications and other information on
your Centro.
A genre of software that includes
applications such as Palm Desktop
software, Microsoft Outlook, Lotus Notes,
and ACT!. PIMs generally store contacts,
schedules, tasks, and memos.
Palm® OS by ACCESS
PIN (personal identification number)
The operating system of your Centro. Palm
OS is known for its simplicity of use and for The four-digit password assigned to your
the large number of compatible third-party
applications that can be added to your
Centro.
SIM card by AT&T. Turning on the PIN lock
secures your wireless account. See also
PUK.
Partnership
PIN2 (personal identification number 2)
Two Bluetooth devices—for example, your A code that protects certain network
Centro and a hands-free device—that can
connect because each device finds the
same passkey on the other device. Once
you form a partnership with a device, you
don’t need to enter a passkey to connect
with that device again. Partnership is also
known as paired relationship, pairing,
trusted device, and trusted pair on some
devices.
settings such as call barring or fixed dialing.
PUK (PIN unlock key)
A special extended password assigned to
your SIM card. If you enter the wrong PIN
more than three times, your SIM card is
blocked and you must call AT&T for the
PUK.
Quick key
Phone
A letter that you can press and hold to
activate a favorite app. For example, create
a speed-dial button for your mother’s
number and enter the letter M for “Mom”
as the Quick Key. Then when you want to
The application on your Centro that enables
you to make and receive phone calls.
T E R M S
287
call her, press and hold M. Your Centro
dials the number.
SMS
The service that exchanges short text
messages almost instantly. Text messages
are typically sent to a mobile phone
number, rather than to an email address
(although this too is possible). These
messages can usually include up to 160
characters; messages with more than 160
characters are automatically split into
several messages. You can send and
receive SMS messages while you are on a
voice call.
SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card
The smartcard, inserted in your Centro,
that contains your mobile account
information, such as your phone number
and the services to which you subscribe.
Phonebook entries and SMS messages
can also be stored on the SIM card.
Slide
A collection of text, pictures, videos, and
sounds that are grouped together within a
multimedia message created in the
Messaging application. During playback, all
the items within a particular slide appear
on the same screen. If a multimedia
message contains multiple slides, each
slide can be viewed separately during
playback.
Streaming
Technology that enables you to access
media content—for example, watch video
or listen to an audio program—directly
from the Internet on your Centro without
needing to download a file to save on your
Centro.
User folder
The folder on your computer that contains
the information you enter in Palm Desktop
software and the information you enter on
your Centro and synchronize with
Palm Desktop software.
T E R M S
288
FCC RF Safety Statement
Important safety and
legal information
In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines, users
MUST use one of the following types of bodyworn accessories.
3
A Palm® brand body-worn accessory that has been tested for
SAR compliance and is intended for use with this product.
4
An accessory that contains NO metal (snaps, clips, etc.) and
provides AT LEAST 1.5 cm of separation between the users body
and the unit.
FCC Notice
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
Do NOT use the device in a manner such that it is in direct contact
with the body (i.e., on the lap or in a breast pocket). Such use will
likely exceed FCC RF safety exposure limits. See www.fcc.gov/oet/
rfsafety/ for more information on RF exposure safety.
To view the highest reported (FCC) specific absorption rates (SAR)
Declaration of Conformity
This device meets the FCC Radiofrequency Emission Guidelines and
is certified with the FCC as.
FCC ID number: O8F-728.
Industry Canada ID number: 3905A-728
More information on the device's SAR can be found from the
following FCC website:
•
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
Declaration of Conformity
We, Palm Inc., declare under sole responsibility that the product:
1
2
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
Model name:
Description:
Centro
This device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
PDA phone
Is in conformity with the following standards and/or other normative
document:
Antenna Care/Unauthorized Modifications
Use only the supplied integral antenna. Unauthorized antenna
modifications or attachments could damage the unit and may violate
FCC regulations. Any changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
•
•
•
•
ETSI EN 301 511
ETSI EN 301 908-1
ETSI EN 301 908-2
ETSI EN 300 328
I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y A N D L E G A L I N F O R M A T I O N
289
Static Electricity, ESD, and Your Palm® Device
•
•
•
ETSI EN 301 489-1/-7/-17/-24
EN60950-1
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices
if discharged into the device, so you should take steps to avoid such
an occurrence.
EN 50360
We hereby declare that the above named product is in conformance
to all essential requirements of the RTTE Directive 1999/5/EC.
Description of ESD Static electricity is an electrical charge caused
by the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material. To
most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing more than
annoyances. For example, after walking over a carpet while scuffing
your feet, building up electrons on your body, you may get a shock—
the discharge event—when you touch a metal doorknob. This little
shock discharges the built-up static electricity.
The conformity assessment procedure referred to in Article 10 and
detailed in Annex IV of directive 1999/5/EC has been related to
Articles:
•
•
•
R&TTE Article 3.1 (a) Health and Safety
R&TTE Article 3.1 (b) EMC
ESD-susceptible equipment Even a small amount of ESD can
harm circuitry, so when working with electronic devices, take
measures to help protect your electronic devices, including your
Palm® device, from ESD harm. While Palm has built protections
against ESD into its products, ESD unfortunately exists and, unless
neutralized, could build up to levels that could harm your equipment.
Any electronic device that contains an external entry point for
plugging in anything from cables to docking stations is susceptible to
entry of ESD. Devices that you carry with you, such as your Palm
device, build up ESD in a unique way because the static electricity
that may have built up on your body is automatically passed to the
device. Then, when the device is connected to another device such
as a docking station, a discharge event can occur.
R&TTE Article 3.2 Spectrum Usage
Identification mark:
0984 (Notified Body) CE.
This identification mark is permanently provided on the device label.
The technical documentation relevant to the above equipment will be
held at:
Palm Inc.
950 W Maude Avenue
Sunnyvale, CA. 94085
U.S.A.
Person responsible for making this declaration:
Precautions against ESD Make sure to discharge any built-up
static electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before
touching an electronic device or connecting one device to another.
The recommendation from Palm is that you take this precaution
before connecting your Palm device to your computer, placing a
device in a cradle, or connecting it to any other device. You can do
this in many ways, including the following:
David Woo/Sr Compliance Engineer
Sunnyvale/August 31, 2006
•
Ground yourself when you’re holding your device by
simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground.
For example, if your computer has a metal case and is plugged
into a standard three-prong grounded outlet, touching the case
should discharge the ESD on your body.
®
Bluetooth Qualification Program
Information about this listing can be found at:
Bluetooth® QD ID: B013349
•
•
Increase the relative humidity of your environment.
Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats.
I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y A N D L E G A L I N F O R M A T I O N
290
Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences Conditions that can
contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment
include the following:
•
Promptly dispose of used batteries in accordance with local
regulations.
•
•
Battery usage by children should be supervised.
•
•
Low relative humidity.
Avoid dropping the phone or battery. If the phone or battery is
dropped, especially on a hard surface, and the user suspects
damage, take it to a service center for inspection.
Material type. (The type of material gathering the charge. For
example, synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural
fibers like cotton.)
•
Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion or other
hazard.
•
The rapidity with which you touch, connect, or disconnect
electronic devices.
Precaution against hearing loss Protect your hearing. Listening to
this device at full volume for a long period of time can damage your
hearing.
While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge
static electricity, if you are in an environment where you notice ESD
events, you may want to take extra precautions to protect your
electronic equipment against ESD.
A pleine puissance, l'écoute prolongée du baladeur peut
endommager l'oreille de l'utilisateur. Consultez notre site web
www.palm.com/fr pour plus d'informations.
Battery safety information
•
Do not disassemble or open, crush, bend or deform, puncture or
shred.
•
Do not modify or remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects
into the battery, immerse or expose to water or other liquids,
expose to fire, explosion or other hazard.
•
•
Only use the battery for the system for which it is specified.
Usage Log Your smart device includes a Usage Log that records
software application launches and any device crashes or resets. A
hard reset will not erase the Usage Log. We may, for diagnostic
purposes, access the Usage Log in products returned to Palm.
Only use the battery with a charging system that has been
qualified with the system per this standard. Use of an unqualified
battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage,
or other hazard.
Waste disposal Please recycle appropriately. For appropriate
recycling and disposal instructions please visit: www.palm.com/
•
•
Do not short-circuit a battery or allow metallic conductive objects
to contact battery terminals.
Replace the battery only with another battery that has been
qualified with the system per this standard, IEEE-Std-1725-200x.
Use of an unqualified battery may present a risk of fire, explosion,
leakage or other hazard.
I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y A N D L E G A L I N F O R M A T I O N
291
I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y A N D L E G A L I N F O R M A T I O N
292
Specifications
Radio
•
GSM 850/900/1800/1900 quad band world phone
GPRS class 10, class B
•
•
•
EDGE up to 59kbps per time slot
Supports CSD (circuit-switched data)
Speakerphone
Phone features
•
•
•
•
•
Hands-free headset jack (2.5mm, 4-barrel connector)
Microphone mute option
TTY/TDD compatible
3-way calling
Processor technology
Expansion
Intel PXA270 Bulverde processor, 312MHz
MicroSD card slot
Battery
•
•
11850mAH, rechargeable lithium ion
Removable for replacement
Palm OS® version
Camera
Palm OS 5.4.9
•
•
•
•
•
1.3 megapixel
Still-image capture resolution (1280 x 1024)
2x digital zoom
Video capture resolution (352 x 288)
Automatic light balance
Size
4.2 in. x 2.1 in. x 0.73 in.
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S
293
Weight
4.12 ounces
Connectivity
•
•
IR
®
Bluetooth wireless technology (1.2 compliant)
Touch-sensitive LCD screen (includes stylus)
65,536 colors (16-bit color)
Display
•
•
•
•
User-adjustable brightness
320 x 320 resolution
Keyboard
•
•
Built-in QWERTY keyboard plus 5-way navigator
Backlight for low lighting conditions
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S
294
Included software
•
•
•
•
Phone (including Favorites
and Dial Pad)
•
XM Radio (download
required)
Pics & Videos (includes
camera and camcorder)
•
•
•
Voice Dial
Voice Memo
Messaging (text and
multimedia)
Documents To Go
®
Professional
®
Blazer web browser
•
Calculator (Basic and
Advanced)
(Internet)
•
•
Pocket Tunes™ Deluxe
•
•
•
World Clock
Xpress Mail (download
required)
My Palm Centro
Palm® Desktop software
®
and HotSync® manager
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
VersaMail (email)
Contacts
Calendar
Memos
•
•
•
Push to Talk
Quick Tour
Telenav (download
required)
Tasks
SIM Book
SIM Services
AT&T Mall
AT&T Music
•
•
MobiTV (download
required)
Instant messaging (IM)
Music ID (download
required)
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S
295
System requirements
•
•
•
Windows 2000, XP, or Vista with USB port
Mac OS 10.2–10.3 with USB port
Later versions may also be supported
32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C)
Operating and storage
temperature range
•
•
5% to 90% relative humidity (RH)
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S
296
customer support for 12
accounts
phone services and 10
text messages and 112
TTY connections and 82
voicemail and 57
nicknames 133
photos or videos to
albums 178
Index
SYMBOLS
! in Tasks list 200
NUMERICS
playlists 184
active call buttons 143
Activity Log 103
Add Bookmark command
Add Call button 61
Add Contact command 61
Add New Number dialog 60
Add New Number prompt 61
Add Song button 184
Add to album command 179
adding
accessories 16
bookmarks 153
caller IDs 67, 68
captions to photos 172,
cities to World Clock 197
emoticons 113
private entries 248
QuickText phrases 113
signatures 105
tasks 198
wallpaper 179
addresses
adding recipients 72, 112
entering web 152
highlighting 36
looking up 108
24-hour clock 239
5-way navigator 35, 36
911 calls 245
A
AC charger 19
accessing
application menus 37
applications 45
command buttons 37
documentation 11
email 89, 252
Palm online support 12
Quick Tour 11
World Clock 197
accessories 16
Account Setup dialog 95
accounts
call forwarding and 63
conference calls and 63
sending messages and
synchronizing 269
Advanced Mode (calculator)
agenda lists 189
Alarm check box 191
alarm clock 198
events 190, 191
alarm preferences 198
INDE X
297
alarms
adding calendar 191, 195
recording tones for 196
selecting tones for 195,
Album command 179
Album list 98, 176, 179
video albums
antenna 289
applets 151
application categories 241
application list view 241
applications
See also specific built-in
app; third-party apps
accessing menus in 37
beaming 222
selecting 45
sending over Bluetooth
devices 219
synchronizing 30, 223
transferring to device 26
troubleshooting 257
updating information in 30
upgrading and 27
viewing information about
alert buttons 116
changing default 243
closing 43, 282
copying 231
Applications button 43, 45
appointments 190, 270
See also events
Archive folder 217
area codes 81, 133
area conversions 213
arrow icons 35
Ask to add unknown phone
numbers check box 69
AT&T accounts. See
accounts
Alert Sound pick list 104
alerts
See also alarms
changing status of 139
clearing 212
downloading messages
hiding text in 120
sending Call-Me 146
aligning the screen 240
deleting 27, 216, 217
getting help with 216
highlighting 45
making phone calls and 60
moving around in 33
playing music and 183
running on expansion
cards 280
AT&T customer service 12
AT&T Mall 155
AT&T Music 155
cards
searching in 211
Attach Signature option 106
I N D E X
298
attachments
removing 97
storing large 280
attendee information 192
voice memos
backlight 39, 238
Backlight button 238
Backspace key 39
blank screens 263
blank text messages 113
blank time slots 194
Blazer application 151
See also web browser
Bluetooth adapters 161, 162
Bluetooth application 74
Bluetooth devices
connecting to 74, 163–
Backup folder 217, 258
battery
charging 19–21
conserving 21, 251
disposing of 263
audio adapters 74
Audio Caption command 172
Auto Accept Invitations
options 147
Auto Lock Device option 247
Auto naming pick list 175
precautions for 19
removing 262
enabling 76, 220
optimal range for 74
battery door release 16
battery icons 21, 84
Auto-complete option 159
receiving info over 220
sending over 219
switching between 77
troubleshooting 274, 278
visibility options for 165,
Auto-off After pick list 252
auto-off interval 285
command 69
Beam Category command
Availability icons 137–138
availability pick list 131
Beam command 221, 222
Beam From pick list 222
Beam Receive pick list 252
Beam Status dialog 221, 222
bell icon 84, 264
B
back icon (browser) 153
Background check box 194
background music 177
Bluetooth icons (Phone
application) 84
Bill Balance button 70
INDE X
299
Bluetooth technology 161,
opening apps and 43
restoring default 242
overview 189
setting default view 194
apps
calendar views 189, 194
call forwarding icon 83
Call Preferences dialog box
Call Totals dialog box 65
View
call waiting 62
Call Waiting dialog box 62
camcorder resolution 173
Bookmark Page icon 155
Bookmarks View icon 154
border glow (highlight) 36
brightness duration
(backlight) 238, 252
Brightness slider 251
browsing files 231
browsing
See also applications;
specific app
web browsing and 153
Buttons Preferences screen
C
cache 160, 280
Calc button 212
calculating device space 26
calculator 41, 212
Calculator app 212–213
calculator modes 212
calendar
accessing 189
color-coding events 193
deleting events 193
saving 118
built-in security software 244
business cards 69
camera buttons 172
Camera icon 171
buttons
camera lens 16
viewing items on 81, 194
Calendar application
changing fonts for 238
changing views for 189
See also favorite buttons
accessing command 37
customizing 242
camera settings 174
Camera View 174, 179
cancelling menu selections
Caps Lock mode 40
I N D E X
300
car kits 73
Card category 230
Card Info button 232
card readers 182
carrying cases 273
cascading style sheets 153,
Category command 241
category marker 194
category names 241
naming 27, 264
screen fonts 238
sync method 268
web page layouts 152
character limits
not responding 259
personalizing 235
precautions for 289, 291
protecting 243–250
required items for 10
setting up 13
memos 206
text messages 113
character searches 211
charge indicator 15, 20, 21
charger cable 20
charging battery 19–21
charging device 19, 20, 22
chat sessions 119, 120
Choose song button 183
Choose Songs command
troubleshooting 12, 255
turning on and off 49
unlocking 246
unpacking 9
certificates 151
Category tab 200
Center button 15
changing
bookmarks 154
Centro smart device
adding security for 249
compatible hands-free
devices for 73
contact information 67
contact names 133
default applications 243
email accounts 102
events 193
Cingular
connecting to PCs 29
displaying space on 26
favorite buttons 72
owner information 249
personal IDs 246
playlists 184
SIM cards 11
circuit-switched data
connections 285
city information 197, 251
City pick list 197
installing third-party apps
and 28, 281
primary buttons 242
QuickText phrases 113
Clear Cache button 160
Clear Cookies button 160
INDE X
301
See also World Clock
closing
application menus 37
applications 43, 282
pick lists 38
color palette 174
color preferences 121, 174,
color themes 240
color-coding events 193
colored backgrounds 36
command buttons 37
Community 156
completed tasks 199, 200,
completion dates 201
Compress Day View check
box 194
compressed files 214, 215
computers
connecting device to 29
creating partnerships for
transferring apps to 215
transferring media to 180
transferring music from
Con button (calculator) 213
Conduit Settings command
Conference button 63
conference calls 63, 144
Confirm message deletion
check box 120
conflicting apps 231, 257
conflicting events 194
Connect Bluetooth
command 76
connection icons (phone) 83
connection icons (web) 152
connections
device to PCs 29
dial-up networking and
hands-free devices and
synchronizing over
Bluetooth 225, 227
synchronizing over
troubleshooting 272, 276,
VPNs and 252
constants 213
Contact Edit dialog box 66
contact names 52
contacts
adding alerts for 138, 139
adding photos to 67, 179
adding ringtones for 68
categorizing 66
changing info for 67
checking availability of 137
copying 70
creating 66, 132
deleting 69, 134
displaying 67
installing from 215, 259
quarantined files on 257
setting up DUN
entering events for 192
entering phone numbers
for 60, 65
connections for 162
synchronizing with 25–30,
messaging preferences
for 121
restrictions for 60
importing 67
looking up 52, 80
marking as private 66
I N D E X
302
renaming 133
saving 118
corporate email accounts
PTT groups 132, 134, 140
speed-dial buttons 71–72
text memos 207
See language settings
coupling 272
voice captions 172, 179
voice memos 207
Contacts application 65, 69,
CSD (circuit-switched data)
connections 285
contracts 10
coverage area alerts 79
Coverage in/out pick list 79
crashes 264
pick list 121
creating
application categories 241
bookmarks 153
business cards 69
events 190, 191
multimedia messages
current date and time 196
current events 81
conversion functions
(calculator) 212, 213
Convert to cellular icon 143
Copy Items dialog box 178
Copy items to pick list 178
Copy to command 178
Copy To pick list 231
copying
customizing
applications 241–243
buttons 242
calendar 194–195
chat sessions 120
email 102–106
hands-free devices 77
MMS messaging 120
system date and time 250
system sounds 237–238
tasks 201
applications 231
contact information 70
media files 181
nicknames 133
web browser 158–160
messages 118
partnerships 75, 161
playlists 184
private entries 248
PTT contact lists 132–134
D
phone numbers 51, 158
photos or videos 178
text 157
daily events 195
data service icons 152
copyrighted materials 177
INDE X
303
data services 89, 151
databases 211
delays 247, 275
Date & Time Preferences
screen 191, 250
Delete events older than pick
list 193
Desktop software
device
date formats 239
Delete From pick list 217
Delete Memo command 207
Delete Task command 201
Deleted folder 116
deleting
features described 9
getting help with 11
device names
date preferences 250
Date stamp pick list 175
dates
See also calendar
adding to photos 175
changing event 193
selecting 190
setting system 250
sorting on 118
alerts 212
attachments 97
bookmarks 154
cookies 160
defined 285
selecting 264
selecting Centro 27
devices; hands-free
devices; Centro smart
device
synchronizing 250
viewing current 196
daylight savings 197, 198
decimal values 213, 239
decompression utilities 215
Default Alarm pick list 196
Default Apps Preferences
screen 243
device names 27
events 193
favorite buttons 73
files 280
Dial another call prompt 62
Dial button 55
Dial Number dialog box 55
Dial Pad button 59
Dial Preferences screen 81
dial text message 163
dialog boxes 12, 37, 285
dial-up networking 84, 160–
memos 207
music from playlists 184
passwords 248
photos 172, 179, 180
playlists 185
default settings 242
Default View pick list 81, 194
degrees 213
digital cameras 175
See also camera
dimmed images 263
PTT groups 137
tasks 201
I N D E X
304
dimming backlight 238, 252
dimming the screen 44
Disable cookies box 159
disabling touch-sensitive
features 245
Discovery icon 165
discussion groups 12
display formats 239
Display my name in chat
window as option 121
Display Options box 194
Display Options command
downloading
email messages 102
multimedia messages
Palm info and updates 12
text messages 116
Downloads bookmark 156
drained battery icon 21
Draw on command 172
drivers 228
Due Date pick list 199
error messages 282
event categories 194
favorite buttons 54
free space 26
items in pick lists 38
multimedia messages
personal calendar 189
phone status 83
signal strength 83
slide shows 177
video recording time 173
web addresses 159
web pages 151, 153
Documents application
See also Documents To
Go
displaying
alerts 211
application info 218
application menus 37
applications 45, 241
bookmarks 154
connection info 152, 163
Dynamic Call command 141
E
echoes 272
INDE X
305
EditBookmarkListdialogbox
selecting default
application for 243
encryption 151
Eng(x) display format 213
Edit Bookmarks command
setting alerts for 104
setting preferences for
connections
Edit Categories option 193
Edit Category screen 68
Edit Favorite command 72
Edit Group command 135
Edit Group dialog box 136
sorting 101
troubleshooting 275
viewing status of 101
envelope icon 101
Escalate ring tone volume
check box 78
Edit Playlist dialog box 184
edit screens 37
changing 102
event conflicts 194
Effects pick list 174
email
Email application
opening 44
VersaMail application
email applications 65, 89,
event preferences 191
events
categorizing 193
changing 193
color-coding 193
creating 190, 191
deleting 193
entering incorrect time
zones and 270
scheduling repeating 192
synchronizing 189
troubleshooting 270–271
viewing duration of 194
See also attachments
accessing 89, 252
adding signatures 105
addressing 72, 96
defining buttons for 72
deleting 101, 102, 280
dialing from 54
forwarding 100
resending 97
restrictions for 60
retrieving 85, 99, 102
scrolling 99
Email icon 93
emergency calls 245
emoticons 113
empty battery icon 21
empty time slots 194
Empty Trash command 102
Enable background play
check box 184
Enable Fixed Number Dialing
check box 246
I N D E X
306
Exchange ActiveSync
Exchange Address Book 269
transferring applications
from 26, 231
troubleshooting 232
viewing information about
saving 206
streaming 157
transferring to device 26,
exiting applications 282
expansion card
installing from 216
expansion card slot 229, 230
expansion cards
accessing items on 231
caution for 231, 233
copying to 178, 231
deleting apps on 216
displaying photo or video
albums on 176
downloading to 156
formatting 232, 233
inserting 229
managing files on 231
moving files to 27, 181
opening items on 206,
removing 230
renaming 232
Export to SIM command 70
extensions (phone) 71
Extract Call button 63
Files application 231
financial calculator 212
financial functions 213
Find dialog box 211
Find Text on Page command
finding
chat sessions 119
specific characters 211
text 158, 211
wireless services 82
firewalls 252
Fixed display format 213
fixed number dialing 246
flight mode 50
Float display format 213
folder pick list 101
folders
F
fade setting 194
Fast mode (browser) 159
Fast mode icon 153
Favorites tab 54
FDN list 246
features 9
feedback 272
files
See also specific type
attaching to email 98, 99
browsing 231
checking size of 218
deleting 280
accessing 269
deleting messages in 118
locating 265
sending attachments to
storing information on
sorting messages in 118
INDE X
307
switching between Inbox
forgetting passwords 246,
Format Card command 233
format options (email) 105
formatting expansion cards
forums 12
Forward all calls list 64
forward icon (browser) 153
forwarding
Getting Started CD 10
Glossary 285
GPRS connections 83, 276,
GPS receivers 167
gradients 213
headset button 59
headset jack 16
hexadecimal characters 213
Hide Records option 248
hiding
blank time slots 194
private entries 248
toolbars 157, 177
highlight, moving 36
highlighting
applications 45
items in pick lists 38
menu items 37
phone numbers 55
text 36, 37
web links 36, 152
hints 247
History list 158
Hold button 59
holidays 192
home city 197
home page 153, 158
HotSync Log 267
H
Handheld overwrites
Desktop option 224
Handheld overwrites
Macintosh option 225
hands-free devices
adding 73, 76
email 100
checking status of 84
customizing 77
disabling or enabling 59
entering passkeys for 75
finding compatible 74
troubleshooting 273–275
Hands-free Setup button 75
hanging up phone 60, 62, 63
phone calls 63–65
Free Space information 26
freezes 260
full charge (battery) 19
G
Game Volume pick list 238
connections
hardware 9
I N D E X
308
synchronization
HotSync Setup button 226
HotSync technology 286
HTML messages 100, 105
incompatible applications
Incompatible Apps folder 26
Info screens 218
information
beaming 221
synch software 28–29
third-party applications
VPN client software 252
Instant Messaging 123
instant messaging 127, 295
internal memory. See
memory
alternate characters
World Clock
language settings
I
icons 241
entering 39–41
erasing all 264
IM application 295
images
See also photos; pictures
dimmed 263
disabling web 153, 159
downloading 156
saving 157
selecting as wallpaper 80
sending 114, 115
transferring to expansion
cards 27, 280
marking private 248–249
sending over Bluetooth
devices 219
See also web browsing
Into album pick list 178
updating 30, 209
upgrading and 27
Install Tool 215
Invite ALL Members
command 136
Invite Selected Member
command 136
troubleshooting 278
importing
contact information 67
phone numbers 199
Incoming dialog box 104
installing
defined 286
INDE X
309
iTunes 182
List By option 69
list screens 36, 37
See also pick lists
list view (applications) 241
listening to
voice captions 176
voice memos 208
voicemail 57
location information 250
lock codes 245
Lock Device dialog box 247
Lock SIM check box 245
locking
phone 245–246
screen 245
smart device 246, 247
logging in to corporate
servers 252
logic functions 213
looping (device) 260
losing
low coverage areas 271
lowercase letters 40
J
M
JavaScript elements 159
Mac systems
installing from 29, 215
removing apps and 217
requirements for 25
synchronizing and 31,
transferring music from
uninstalling desktop
software and 267
magnet 17
Mail Chooser
opening 44
Mail Type pick list 95
Main tab 50, 80
Manage Playlists command
map (World Clock) 197
marking information as
K
keyboard
dialing from 52
entering alternate
characters from 41, 42
locking 49, 244
restoring defaults for 242
searching from 81
Keyguard 49, 244
Known Caller pick list 78
L
Label color pick list 121
land-line phones 56
language settings 19, 239,
Lanyard loop 16
laptops 227, 228
length functions 213
I N D E X
310
mathematical functions 213
Media application 180
media features 22, 49
Media Player 182
memory
messages
metric values 213
and text messages
defining buttons for 72
displaying status of 122
invalid characters in 114
Microsoft Excel
spreadsheets 98, 205
Microsoft Exchange servers
running apps and 280
saving 193
storing web pages and
saving as drafts 97, 114
selecting phone numbers
in 54
See Documents To Go
Outlook
memory slots (calculator)
See also notes; voice
memos
Memos application
changing fonts for 238
overview 203
Memos button 207
Menu icon 37
setting color of 121
setting formats for 105
setting preferences for
setting priority for 116
troubleshooting 275
Messages tab 120
Messaging application
changing fonts for 238
customizing 120
Windows systems
Microsoft Word 98, 205
mirror 16
mismatched languages 259
MMS messaging 112, 286
MMS messaging services
MMS Receipts option 120
mobile networks 272
MobiTV 295
opening 44
modems 161
menu items 37
overview 112
Modify FDN command 246
moving through web pages
Menu key 15, 39
menu shortcuts 38
menus 37
Message Center option 146
message icons 122
Message Tone pick list 122
sorting options for 118
status icons for 122
viewing contacts and 65
INDE X
311
multimedia icons 122
multimedia messages
adding voice memos 208
addressing 115
attaching photos or videos
checking status of 85
copying 118
music
adjusting volume 183
synchronizing and 264,
naming
categories 241
expansion cards 232
photo albums 171
photo groups 175
answering phone and 56
changing playlists for 184
creating playlists for 184
downloading 156
listening to 74, 180, 183
memory and 280
deleting 116, 118, 120
dialing from 54
pausing 183
selecting 183
playlists 184
PTT groups 134
video albums 173
playing 117
stopping 183
uploading 181
music files 156, 181, 280
Music ID 156
voice memos 207, 208
navigator buttons 35, 36
network connection icon 163
Network tab 121
previewing 116
prioritizing 116
restrictions for 60
retrieving 85
Tunes
New Bookmark dialog 153
sending 112, 116
Music_Audio folder 182
New Favorite command 71
New Favorites dialog 71, 72
New Group command 134
New Group dialog 134
New message option 120
New Message screen 97
Next Song button 183
nicknames 133
setting delivery
confirmation for 120
sorting 118
My Centro icon 11
My Minutes button 70
N
storing 280
names
troubleshooting 112, 275
viewing details of 118
messaging services
making PTT calls and 131,
personalizing 133
sorting on 118
Normal mode 153, 159
Note button 66
I N D E X
312
notifications 57
operating systems 25, 259,
appointments and 190
defined 286
See also alerts
number formats 239
number pad 66
Optimized Mode 151, 152
OrganizeFavoritescommand
Outlook
adding caller IDs and 68
appointments and 190
duplicate entries in 269
synchronizing with 29, 31,
Outlook folders 269
password-protecting 249
reinstalling 269
synchronizing with 29, 31,
troubleshooting 259, 265
uninstalling 267
viewing and editing media
from 180
PALM folder 171, 173
Tool
Palm online support 12
Palm OS (defined) 287
Palm OS application files 214
O
offline synchronization 269
offline viewing (web) 154
on-device documentation 11
online forums 12
online support (Palm) 12
opening
Applications View 45
Call Log 55
Dial Pad 51, 59
email applications 277
files 205, 206
owner information 249
Owner Preferences screen
Palm Software Installation
CD 259
paper clip icon 97, 100
partial battery icon 21
Password box 247, 249
password hints 247
History list 158
HotSync manager 223
Pocket Tunes 183
Push to Talk 131
Quick Tour 11
Redial list 55
World Clock 197
P
Page View 154, 158, 159
paging 113
Palm Desktop software
adding caller IDs and 68
INDE X
313
passwords
changing 248, 249
deleting 248
personal information 187,
selecting tones for 78–79
service carrier for 10
dialing 71
email and 94
personal information
managers 259, 287
personalizing device 235
phone
See also phone calls;
Centro smart device
silencing ringer for 56, 237
switching to PTT calls and
troubleshooting 271–273
turning on and off 50
forgetting 246, 249
owner info and 249
requiring 246
unlocking Centro and 246
voicemail and 58
Paste command 158
pasting
phone numbers 51
text 158
Pause button 183
pausing
music 183
adding hands-free devices Phone application
for 73, 76
answering 56, 62, 77
conference calls and 63
getting started with 23
customizing 77–83
defined 287
displaying events in 195
overview 47
selecting wallpaper for
status icons for 83–85
streamed content 157
video recording 174
voice memos 208
PDF files 98, 205
Pending invitation icon 135
pending messages 120, 123
listening to music and 56
locking 245–246
overview 58
Phone Call screen 56
phone calls
receiving messages and
See also phone; phone
numbers
restrictions for 60
running apps and 60
searching for wireless
networks for 82
adding a second 61
disabling screen for 245
driving and 73
forwarding 63–65
I N D E X
314
muting 59
placing on hold 59, 61
receiving 56, 62
highlighting 36
importing 199
pasting into Dial Pad 51
redialing most recent 55
saving 60
pick lists 36, 38
Pics & Videos app 175
Pics & Videos icon 176
picture formats 175
Picture list 177
restricting 246
sending to voicemail 56
switching between 62
viewing details about 58
Phone Display Options
command 80
phone icons 83
light
Phone Info screen 24
phone numbers
adding pauses to 66, 71
adding prefixes to 81, 82
clearing 51
Phone Off message 50, 83
Photo Settings screen 174
photos
See also pictures
adding captions 172
copying 178
displaying info about 179
downloading 156
grouping 176
rotating 179
selecting as wallpaper 179
selecting background 194
setting default size 175
pictures
See also images; photos
attaching to multimedia
setting preferences for
synchronizing 68
PIN unlock key 287
PINs 245, 287
plain text formats 100, 105
Play button 183
Play icon (browser) 157
playing
streamed content 157
video clips 174, 176
voice captions 176
voice memos 208
voicemail messages 57
playlists 184
copying 51, 158
creating Quick Keys for 72
creating speed-dial
buttons for 71–72
dialing extra digits with 71
dialing with voice
commands 53
getting device 24
synchronizing 180
viewing 175, 176, 180
INDE X
315
plug-ins 151, 277
Pocket Tunes icons 183
POP protocols 105
Power/End button 49, 50
preferences
system sounds 237
tasks 201
web browser 154
web pages 158–160
Prefs button 250
Prompt sound pick list 174
protecting device 243–250
protecting personal
protecting the screen 16
proxy servers 160
PTT accounts 130
PTT buttons 143
See also applications;
specific application
preset delays 247
preset passkeys 75, 165,
PTT calls
See also Push to Talk
adding a second 144
checking contact
alarm tones 195
alert tones 79
applications 242, 243
buttons 242
calculator 213
pressing keyboard keys 39
pressing onscreen buttons
availability 137
converting to cellular 143
customizing 147
camera 174
Previous Song button 183
primary applications 242
primary buttons 242
prioritizing messages 116
prioritizing tasks 199, 201
privacy flag 199
Privacy Mode check box 120
Private check box 248
processor 293
ending 140
contact information 69
country-specific 239
email 102, 104
events 191
hands-free devices 77
Keyguard 244
owner information 249
power settings 251
ringtones 78
placing on hold 143
sending messages and
setting availability for 131,
updating names for 147
viewing details about 142
viewing messages for 146
PTT group names 134
software
progress indicator (video)
system colors 240
system info 191, 250
I N D E X
316
PTT groups
QuickText phrases 113
refreshing web pages 153,
reinstalling Palm Desktop
software 269
reinstalling third-party
applications 257, 258, 261
Remember Last Category
option 69
Reminder Sound pick list 196
Remote Address Lookup
Remove from album
command 179
Rename Card command 232
Rename Memo command
renaming contacts 133
repeating alarms 196
repeating events 192, 195
repeating tasks 199
rescheduling events 193
Reset Counters button 65
Resolution pick list 175
changing 135–136
contacting members in
deleting 137
R
radians 213
radio 293
random numbers 213
range (Bluetooth devices) 74
Rcl button (calculator) 213
receipts (messaging) 120
recently viewed web page
icon 153
battery
Record command 221
Record Completion Date
check box 201
recorder 207
recording
ringtones 78
sounds 196
voice memos 207
voice messages 145
joining 135
leaving 137
PTT Settings dialog box 147
pTunes icon 181
PUK (PIN unlock key) 287
Purge pick list 119
purging information 27
push technology 106–108
Push to Talk app 16, 127,
See also PTT calls
Push to Talk status icons 85
Q
quick buttons 43–44, 242
Quick Install 287
Quick Keys 72, 287
Quick Tour 11
recovering information 264
recovering passwords 249
Redial list 55
redirector (websites) 277
INDE X
317
highlighting items on 36
locking 245
Return key 39
saving
moving around on 33, 35
protecting 16
Review photos/videos pick
list 175
calendars 118
contact information 118
files 206
troubleshooting 263–264,
waking up 49
screen fonts 238
screen protectors 264
scrolling 152, 159
Ringer switch 17, 50
ringtone file types 114, 156
Ringtone pick list 68
ringtones
adding to caller IDs 68
downloading 77, 156
recording 78
images 157
messages 97, 114
phone numbers 60
playlists 184
video clips 174, 175
voice memos 207
web pages 154
sending with messages
specific characters 211
text 158, 211
wireless services 82
secondary apps 242
secure websites 151, 152,
security certificates 151
Security command 249
Security screen 247
security software 244
rotating photos 179
scientific calculator 212
scientific notation 213
screen
activating items on 36
activating wrong features
S
Save As command 206
Save as Contact command
Save as Wallpaper command
Save List button 184
Save Page command 154
Save Picture command 118
adjusting brightness 58,
aligning 240
dimming 44
disabling 244, 245
I N D E X
318
Select Font dialog box 239
Select Media screen 98
Set Your Name option 147
settings (incompatible) 257
Show Time Bars option 194
Show timestamps in chats
option 121
self-portrait mirror 16
Send button 15
Send command 219
Send To Handheld droplet
sending
applications over
Bluetooth 219
Shift/Find key 40, 211
Shop Music 156
SMS messaging
signal strength 83, 271
Signal Strength icon 271
signatures 105
Show Address Bar option
silencing the ringer 56
Call-Me alerts 146
calls to voicemail 56
email (Xpress Mail) 111
multimedia messages 112
silent alerts 121
Show Category Column
option 194
SIM card
Cingular 11
SIT files 214, 215
size information 218
slide shows 177
Show Completed Tasks
option 201
to chat rooms 120
video clips 174, 177
voice memos 208
voice messages 145
Sent folder 122
Slideshow Setting command
Show Due Tasks option 194
service contracts 10
Set All Contact Alerts
command 139
Show Priorities option 201
ShowSIMPhonebookoption
SMS messaging 112, 288
soft resets 259
software
See also applications
accessing 10, 156
Set Contact Alert option 139
INDE X
319
conflicts with 267
installing 269
troubleshooting 259
uninstalling 267
speaker 16
Speakerphone button 59
special characters 40, 42,
support (Palm) 12
Swap button 62
camera
updating 257
Software Installation CD 259
speed-dial icon 54
sync cable 31
Sort by check box 201
Sort by Date command 118
spreadsheets 98, 205
starting chat sessions 119
sync connector pin 16
synchronization
Bluetooth devices and
device names and 28
Exchange ActiveSync and
offline 269
Outlook and 269
precautions for 26
removing apps and 217
setting up device for 25–
Sort command 118
Sort contacts by availability
setting 147
static electricity 290
statistical functions 213
statistical information 218
status icons 83–85, 101
stereo adapters 74, 180
Sto button (calculator) 213
storing
sorting
messages 101, 118
tasks 201
Sound & Alerts Preferences
screen 195
Centro 16, 17
Sound Off position (ringer)
music files 182
notes 206
Sound On position (ringer)
photos 169, 171
Sounds button 237
space (device) 26, 280
Space key 39
streaming content 157, 288
starting 31
third-partyapplicationsand
troubleshooting 264–271
support (AT&T) 12
I N D E X
320
synchronization software
Synchronize the files setting
system colors 240
system dates and time 197,
viewing attachments and
Tasks application 198, 238
Tasks button 198
addressing 113
dialing from 54
downloading 116
making calls and 119
opening 116
system requirements 25
retrieving 85
technical support (AT&T) 12
selecting links in 117
setting alerts for 121
special characters and 114
troubleshooting 275
third-party applications
5-way navigator and 35
adding security and 249
T
phone calls
temperature conversions
text
copying 157
displaying on backgrounds
entering 40, 207
resizing 152
truncated 271
text message icon 122
text messages
See also messages
Tap and Drag check box 159
tasks
See also events
categorizing 199
creating 198
deleting 201
marking as private 199
prioritizing 199, 201
beaming and 223
compatibility with 25, 28
deleting 27, 281
getting help with 216
hard resets and 260
installing 257, 280
INDE X
321
manually deleting 217
moving 27
Unknown Caller pick list 78
unlocking
smart device 246
the keyboard 244
searching in 211
synchronizing and 28
troubleshooting 281–282
uninstalling 216, 260
VPN clients and 253
third-party applications
screen 240
transmission delays 275
travel alarm 198
trickle-charging device 20
trigonometric functions 213
troubleshooting 12, 255
truncated text 271
Trusted Devices button 164
Trusted Devices list 161,
updating
application software 257
World Clock 197
time
uploading music files 181
uppercase characters 40
urgent messages 122
See also web links
USB ports 30
Use color for pick list 121
user discussion groups 12
user folders 258, 265, 288
User Guide 11
recording videos and 173
scheduling events and
setting system 250
viewing 196
trusted pairs. See
partnerships
time bars 194
TTY/TDD devices 82
tutorial 11
Typing starts search option
time formats 239
time preferences 250
time slots (calendar) 194
Time Zone pick list 190
Timed Events check box 195
timestamps 121
tips 9, 11
Tips icon 12
U
unauthorized users 243
Unfiled category 220
uninstalling
Palm software 267
usernames 95
V
Validity Period option 120
I N D E X
322
VersaMail application
customizing 102–106
documentation for 280
getting started with 92
opening 93
jumping to specific
sections of 174
voicemail
checking for 84
disabling alerts for 57
listening to 57
retrieving 58, 84
sending calls to 56
setting up 57
recording 115, 172–173
removing from albums
saving 174, 175
setting up 93, 94, 106
troubleshooting 275
version numbers 218
setting default size 175
setting preferences 174
synchronizing 180
viewing 175, 176, 180
Voicemail Alert pick list 79
volume
alarm tones 195
alert tones 79
music 183
ringer 80
video files 114, 156, 176
Video Settings screen 174
videos
adding to albums 178, 179
adjusting volume for 174
View Contact command 133
virtual private networks 252
Visibility pick list 166, 220
voice captions
adding 172, 179
overriding 177
ringtones 78
video clips 174
voice memos 208
volume conversions
(calculator) 213
volume preferences 237
playing 176
Voice Dialing application 53
copying 178
deleting 174, 180
displaying info about 179
downloading 156
W
Voice Memo list 208
voice messages 145
waking up screen 49
walkie-talkie service 127
grouping 176
INDE X
323
wallpaper 80, 179
warranty 262
setting default app for 243
troubleshooting 276–278
web browsing service 10
web forms 152
setting preferences for
viewing offline 154
web-based email 89
websites
web browser
Web icon 152
accessing email and 89
auto-completion options
for 159
beaming from 221
customizing 158–160
hiding toolbar in 157
restrictions for 151
web pages
adding favorite buttons for
changing fonts for 238
changing layouts for 152
copying text from 157
dialing from 54, 158
See also web browsing
accessing secure 151,
deleting cookies for 160
installing from 214
opening History list for
submitting transactions
and 152, 278
setting home page 158
streaming and 157
unsupported items 277
web browser buttons 153
web browsing
See also web browser
DUN connections and
from smart device 151
memory and 280
restrictions for 60
secure sites and 151
finding text on 158
optimizing 278
weight conversions 213
Windows systems
installing from 215
redirecting 277
removing apps and 217
requirements for 25
sending email and 102
synchronizing and 29, 31,
transferring music from
upgrading and 257, 267
resizing text on 152
saving 154
scrolling 152, 159
selecting most recent 154
selecting text on 157, 159
sending email from 151
I N D E X
324
viewing multimedia on
accounts
wireless connections 149,
wireless modems 161
wireless networks 82
Word documents 98, 205
World Clock 196–198
World Clock icon 197
world map 197
personal account setup
Y
Wrap Search check box 158
Year View 189
X
Z
XM Radio 156
ZIP files 214, 215
zoom settings (camera) 172
computer setup 110
corporate account setup
INDE X
325
Palm, Inc.
950 W. Maude Ave.
Sunnyvale, CA 94085-2801
United States of America
PN: 406-11188-00
|
Yamaha CDC 655 User Manual
Toastmaster TCM12CDCAN User Manual
Toastmaster MEMB1W User Manual
Sony Xperia L 1271 1960 User Manual
Sony CDP XE330 User Manual
Seagate Constellation ST32000645SS User Manual
Quantum Bigfoot CY User Manual
Philips Xenium CTX500GRY User Manual
Omega Engineering OM EL WIN USB OM EL USB 3 User Manual
Nokia 6610 User Manual